Yamaha DSP-Z11 User Manual (English)

GEBRL
AV Amplifier
OWNERS MANUAL
English
Front panel
A B C
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
ON
PURE DIRECT
ON/OFF
OFF
INPUT
SPEAKERS AUDIO SELECT A B
STRAIGHT ZONE CONTROLS
PROGRAM
MENU
VOLUME
ZONE ON/OFF
EFFECT REC OUT/ ZONE 2
MULTI ZONE
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
TONE CONTROL
ZONE 4 SILENT CINEMA
PUSH ENTER
YPAO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
USB
PHONES
OPTIMIZER MIC
VIDEO AUX
E J
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
MENU
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
TONE CONTROL
PUSH ENTER
SILENT CINEMA
YPAO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
USB
PHONES
OPTIMIZER MIC
VIDEO AUX
2 En
Remote control
1 D 2
POWER TV POWER AV STANDBY POWER
MULTI BD HD DVD CBL SAT TUNER
V-AUX
PHONO
MD TAPE CD-R
DVD
CD
Backlight mode The remote control is equipped with the motion sensor and the remote control lights up the backlight corresponding to the motions or operation. If you do not want to lights up the backlight when this unit detects motions, change the backlight mode (see page 104). Simplified remote control This products is supplied with the simplified remote control. Refer to Simplified remote control on page 110.
DTV
DVR NET USB
VCR
DOCK
4 5 6 7 8 9 0
RETURN MEMORY PC/MCX
SELECT SETUP ID MACRO MODE
AMP TV SOURCE
F G H I
ZONE
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
LEVEL TITLE BAND
Optional component control area button ( ) You can control the desired component without changing the input source of this unit (see page 102).
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU
ENTER
A-E
J K L
DISPLAY MUTE
Q
CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB 1 2 3 MOVIE 5 STEREO 6 STRAIGHT 0 ENTERTAIN 4
REC NET RADIO USB
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 7 8
CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB 1 2 3
ENTERTAIN 4
THX 9
MOVIE 5 THX 9 PARTY
STEREO 6
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT EXTD SUR. ENT 0 10 SLEEP TV CH HDMI OUT MUTE TV INPUT AUDIO SEL AUDIO 3D DSP
M N O P
TV VOL
3 En
Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland

Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from whom it was purchased. If you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident). The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha undertakes, subject to the conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamahas discretion, without any charge for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair. Conditions 1. The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealers name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a statement detailing the fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the product may be returned at the customers expense. 2. The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland. 3. The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha. 4. The following are excluded from this guarantee: a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear. b. Damage resulting from: (1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party. (2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customers responsibility to ensure the product is adequately packaged when returning the product for repair. (3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamahas instructions on the proper use, maintenance and storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in the country where it is used. (4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamahas control. (5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products. (6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety standards of the country of use and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland. (7) Non AV (Audio Visual) related products. (Products subject to Yamaha AV Guarantee Statement are defined in our website at http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident.) 5. Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply. 6. Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the product. 7. Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data. 8. This guarantee does not affect the consumers statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumers rights against the dealer arising from their sales/purchase contract.
4 En
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the Troubleshooting section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press B MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main room, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 and then disconnect the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are as follows: .................................................. 110/120/220/230240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss.
WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by B MASTER ON/OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power.
For U.K. customers

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet.
Special Instructions for U.K. Model

IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug.
This symbol mark is according to the EU directive 2002/96/EC. This symbol mark means that electrical and electronic equipment, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste. Please act according to your local rules and do not dispose of your old products with your normal household waste.
5 En
Contents
Introduction
Notices .......................................................................................... 8 Features...................................................................................... 10 Getting started........................................................................... 11 Quick start guide....................................................................... 13
Internal Source Operation

Using iPod.............................................................................. 64
Controlling iPod........................................................................ 64 Remote control operation ......................................................... 64 Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode............................ 64 Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode ............................. 64 The functions of the play information display.......................... 65
Preparation
Connections ............................................................................... 20 Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) .................................................................................. 42
Before starting the automatic setup ...............................................42 Using the quick automatic setup....................................................43 Using the basic automatic setup ....................................................44 Reviewing the result of the automatic setup .............................45 Using advanced automatic setup ...................................................46
Using Network/USB features ................................................... 66

Navigating the network and USB menus...................................... 66 Remote control operation ......................................................... 67 Using a PC server or Yamaha MCX-2000 ................................... 68 Installing Windows Media Player 11 on your PC .................... 68 Registering this unit on the Yamaha MCX-2000 ..................... 68 Using the Internet Radio ............................................................... 69 Storing your favorite Internet Radio stations with bookmarks .................................................................... 69 Using a USB storage device or a USB portable audio player ...... 69 Using shortcut buttons .................................................................. 70 Assigning the items to the numeric button (1-8) ...................... 70 Select an item by using numeric buttons (1-8) ......................... 70
Basic Operation
Playback..................................................................................... 50
Basic procedure .............................................................................50 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component...............................50 Selecting the HDMI OUT jack ......................................................51 Selecting the front speaker set .......................................................51 Using the Zone B feature...........................................................51 Using your headphones .................................................................51 Playing video sources in the background of an audio source........51 Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)....................................................................52 Muting the audio output ................................................................52 Using the sleep timer .....................................................................52 Canceling the sleep timer ..........................................................52 Operating this unit by using the graphical user interface (GUI) menu ....................53 Items in GUI menu ....................................................................53 Basic controls in the GUI menu ................................................53 Basic operation of the GUI menu by using the front panel controls...........................................53
Advanced Operation
Advanced sound configurations .............................................. 72
Selecting decoders ........................................................................ 72 Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode)....................................................... 72 Decoder descriptions ................................................................ 72 Selecting decoders used with sound field programs................. 72 Selecting decoders for multi-channel sources .......................... 72 Playing back sources with the THX Surround modes .................. 73 For 2-channel sources............................................................... 73 For multi-channel sources ........................................................ 73
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu..................................... 74

GUI menu overview...................................................................... 76 Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) .................................... 77 Input Select ................................................................................... 81 Manual Setup (Basic).................................................................... 83 Manual Setup (Volume)................................................................ 86 Manual Setup (Sound) .................................................................. 86 Manual Setup (Video)................................................................... 89 Manual Setup (Multi Zone) .......................................................... 91 Manual Setup (Network) .............................................................. 92 Manual Setup (Option) ................................................................. 93 Signal Info. (Input signal information) ......................................... 95 Language....................................................................................... 95
Sound field programs ............................................................... 54

Selecting sound field programs .....................................................54 Sound field program descriptions..................................................54 For audio music sources ............................................................55 For various sources....................................................................57 For visual sources of music .......................................................57 For parties..................................................................................58 For game programs....................................................................58 For movie sources .....................................................................58 Stereo playback .........................................................................59 For compression artifacts (Compressed Music Enhancer mode) ...................................59 Surround decoder mode.............................................................59 THX Surround mode .................................................................59 Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)........................................................60 Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA)..........................................60 Using CINEMA DSP HD mode...................................................60 Enjoying unprocessed input sources..............................................60 Deactivating the STRAIGHT mode ......................................60
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory).................................................................. 96

Saving the current system settings................................................ 96 Saving by the SYSTEM MEMORY buttons............................ 96 Saving by the GUI menu operation .......................................... 96 Renaming the stored settings.................................................... 97 Saved parameters for the main zone......................................... 98 Saved parameters for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 ..................... 98 Loading the stored system settings ............................................... 98 Loading by the SYSTEM MEMORY buttons ......................... 98 Loading by the GUI menu operation........................................ 98 Using examples............................................................................. 99 Example 1: Switching the settings of this unit according to the using situations........................ 99 Example 2: Switching the setting of this unit according to the environment of the listening room ........................... 100
Using audio features ................................................................. 61

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ..............................................................61 Adjusting the tonal quality ............................................................61 Adjusting the speaker level............................................................61
Recording................................................................................... 62
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser (Web Control Center)......................................................... 101
6 En
Contents
Remote control features ......................................................... 102

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components........................102 Controlling this unit ................................................................102 Controlling a TV .....................................................................102 Controlling other components.................................................103 Selecting a component to be controlled ..................................103 Controlling optional components (Option mode) ...................103 Customizing the remote control ..................................................104 Setting the backlight mode of the remote control (LIGHT)........104 Setting remote control codes (P-SET).........................................104 Programming codes from other remote controls (LEARN) ........105 Changing source names in the display window (RNAME) ........106 Macro programming features ......................................................107 Recalling programmed macro-operations ...............................107 Default macro functions ..........................................................108 Programming macro operations (MACRO)............................108 Clearing configurations ...............................................................109 Clearing function sets (CLEAR) .............................................109 Clearing a learned function (ERASE).....................................109 Simplified remote control............................................................110 Setting the controlling zone of the simplified remote control ..........110 Replacing the battery in the simplified remote control ...........110
Introduction Preparation Basic Operation
Using multi-zone configuration ............................................. 111

Step1: Planning the multi-zone system .......................................111 Step2: Connecting the speakers, external amplifiers, and/or other components .........................................................112 Using the internal amplifier of this unit ..................................112 Using external amplifiers ........................................................113 Using the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack ..............113 Connecting Zone video monitor..............................................114 Video signal up-conversion to the zone component video signals ..................................114 Using REMOTE IN/OUT and TRIGGER OUT jacks for Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 ..........................................115 Step3: Setting the zone parameter ...............................................116 Assigning the zone speakers ...................................................116 Controlling Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4........................................116 Basic operation........................................................................116 Selecting the input source Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 ............117 Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4...........117 Setting the sleep timer for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 ............117 Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 ...........118 Using the Zone OSD ...............................................................118 Using the party mode ..................................................................118
Internal Source Operation Advanced Operation
Advanced setup ....................................................................... 119

Using the advanced setup menu ..................................................119
Additional Information
Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 122 Glossary ................................................................................... 128 Parametric equalizer information......................................... 135 Block diagrams ....................................................................... 136 Specifications........................................................................... 138 Index ........................................................................................ 140 List of remote control codes................................................... 144
B MASTER ON/OFF or 3 DVD (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the cover pages at the top of this manual for the information about each position of the parts.
7 En
Notices
About this manual
y indicates a tip for your operation. Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. This unit is equipped with GUI language switching capability. In this manual, the illustrations of the GUI are examples when you set the GUI language to English. A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF or 3 DVD (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the cover pages at the top of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. The symbol with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s).
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This amplifier supports network connections.
HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
SILENT CINEMA is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect, and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WM-DRM Software). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure Content Owners) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Softwares right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Softwares ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
THX, the THX logo and Ultra2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
iPodTM
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
8 En
Introduction
Introduction
Features ................................................................................................ 10 Getting started ..................................................................................... 11
Supplied accessories ................................................................................................................ 11 Using the remote control ......................................................................................................... 12 Opening and closing the front panel door ............................................................................... 12 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) ...................................................... 12
Quick start guide .................................................................................. 13

Preparation: Check the items ................................................................................................... 13 Step 1: Set up your speakers .................................................................................................... 14 Step 2: Connect your Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player and other components .......................... 16 Step 3: Turn on the power and start playback ......................................................................... 17 What do you want to do with this unit? ................................................................................... 18
Features
Built-in 11-channel power amplifier
Minimum RMS output power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ) Front: 140 W + 140 W Center: 140 W Surround: 140 W + 140 W Surround back: 140 W + 140 W Front presence: 50 W + 50 W Rear presence: 50 W + 50 W
Network features
P. 66
NETWORK port to connect a PC and Yamaha MCX-2000 or access the Internet Radio via LAN DHCP automatic or manual network configuration
USB features
P. 69
USB ports to connect a USB storage device, USB Hard disc drive, or a USB portable audio player
Web control feature

Web control capability of this unit by using a Web browser P. 101
Sound field programs P. 54

Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields THX Ultra2 Plus surround modes P. 73 CINEMA DSP HD mode for creating intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field P. 60 Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality multi-channel source playback P. 59 Virtual CINEMA DSP P. 60 SILENT CINEMA P. 60
Automatic speaker setup features

Advanced YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup P. 42 Specialized parametric equalizer for the standing wave reduction P. 44 Multiple point measurement feature for multiple listening positions P. 46 Speaker angle measurement feature for the optimized CINEMA DSP effect P. 60
Digital audio decoders

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio decoder Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder DTS NEO:6 decoder
Other features
192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter GUI (graphical user interface) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video system P. 74 GUI display menu language switching capability (English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish and Russian) P. 95 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input P. 35 Multiple subwoofers connection capability P. 25 Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p S-video signal input/output capability P. 29 Component video input/output capability includes (4 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 2 MONITOR OUTs) P. 28 Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks P. 28 Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources P. 61 Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability P. 86 Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability P. 86 Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning, macro and buttons and display backlight capability P. 102 Simplified remote control P. 110 Advanced amplifier assign capability P. 119 Flexible assignable trigger out jack P. 94 Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2/Zone 3/ Zone 4 using ZONE CONTROLS P. 91 Zone 2 video output (composite and component) and displaying OSD (on-screen display) capability P. 114 System Memory capability for saving and recalling multiple system parameter settings P. 96 Sleep timer P. 52
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) P. 28

HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.3a Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information capability Deep Color (30/36 bit) and xvYCC color video signal transmission capability High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability High definition digital audio format signals capability Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion (composite video S-video component video HDMI digital video) capability for monitor out Analog and HDMI video signal up-scaling P. 89
iPod controlling capability P. 64

DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini
10 En
Getting started
Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
Introduction
Remote control
Simplified remote control

STANDBY POWER
Batteries (4) (AAA, LR03)
Microphone base
V-AUX
PHONO
MD TAPE CD-R
FRONT DIRECTION
DVD
CD
SYSTEM MEMORY 1 2 3 4
DTV
DVR NET USB
VCR
DOCK
INPUT
AMP TV SOURCE SELECT MACRO MODE ZONE
INT SOURCE PRESET
VOLUME
SETUP
ID
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
LEVEL TITLE BAND
PRESET/CH
MUTE
ENTER A-E
RETURN MEMORY PC/MCX REC NET RADIO USB
DISPLAY MUTE
CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB 1 2 3 MOVIE 5 THX 9 PARTY TV VOL STEREO 6
ENTERTAIN 4
Optimizer microphone
Power cable (Two for Asia model)
Note
The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models.
Installing batteries in the remote control
Notes
Change all of the batteries if you notice the operation range of the remote control decreases. Do not use old batteries together with new ones. Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. We strongly recommend that you use alkaline batteries. If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared.
1 2
Take off the battery compartment cover. Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, LR03) according to the polarity markings (+ and ) on the inside of the battery compartment. Snap the battery compartment cover back into place.
11 En
Getting started
Using the remote control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation.
Remote control sensor
Notes
Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. Do not drop the remote control. Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: places of high humidity, such as near a bath places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove places of extremely low temperatures dusty places
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
ON
PURE DIRECT
ON/OFF
OFF
INPUT
STRAIGHT
TUNING MODE
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING EDIT
PROGRAM
MENU
VOLUME
EFFECT
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO
CATEGORY ZONE CONTROLS
SEARCH MODE REC OUT/ ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
TONE CONTROL
MULTI ZONE
ZONE 2 SILENT CINEMA ZONE 3 VIDEO ZONE 4 L AUDIO R OPTICAL
PUSH ENTER
YPAO
S VIDEO
PHONES
OPTIMIZER MIC
VIDEO AUX
HDMI IN
USB
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
30
30
Backlight mode The remote control is equipped with the motion sensor and the remote control lights up the backlight corresponding to the motions or operation. If you do not want to lights up the backlight when this unit detects motions, change the backlight mode (see page 104).
Opening and closing the front panel door

6 LIGHT Lights up the remote control buttons and the display window (4 ). Display window (4 ) When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls.
[1] [2]
MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ID 1 ID 2
[3]
[4]
To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.
[1] ID1/ID2 indicator Indicates the currently selected remote control ID (see page 119). [2] Transmit indicator Appears while the remote control is sending infrared signals. [3] Zone indicators Indicates the currently controlling zone (see page 116). [4] Information display Shows the name of the selected input source that you can control. Infrared window (1 ) Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. Operation mode selector (F ) The function of some buttons depends on the operation mode selector position. AMP Operates the amplifier function of this unit. SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (see page 103). TV Operates the TV (see page 102).
VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

Caution The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are as follows: ...................... AC 110/120/220/230240 V, 50/60 Hz
VOLTAGE SELECTOR 230240V
Voltage indication
12 En
Quick start guide

The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD movie playback in your home theater. See pages 21 to 24 for details of the speaker placement.
Right front presence Left front presence Front right Right subwoofer
Introduction
Surround right
Center Right rear presence Front left
Left subwoofer
Surround back right Surround back left Left rear presence
Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player
Surround left
Preparation: Check the items Step 1: Set up your speakers

P. 14
In these steps, you need the following supplied accessory. Power cable The following items are not included in the package of this unit. Speakers Front speaker ................................................... x 2 Center speaker ................................................ x 1 Surround speaker ............................................ x 4 Front presence speaker .................................. x 2 Rear presence speaker ................................... x 2 Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum required speakers are two front speakers. The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Two surround speakers One center speaker One (or two) surround back speaker(s) Two front presence speakers Two rear presence speakers
Step 2: Connect your Blu-ray Disc/ HD DVD player and other components
P. 16
Step 3: Turn on the power and start playback

P. 17
Active subwoofers ............................................... x 2 Select active subwoofers equipped with an RCA input jack. Speaker cable ..................................................... x 11 Subwoofer cables ................................................ x 2 Select monaural RCA cables. HDMI cables ......................................................... x 2 Select HDMI cables shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player ................................ x 1 Select Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player equipped with an HDMI output jack. Video monitor........................................................ x 1 Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped with an HDMI input jack.
Enjoy Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD playback!
13 En
Quick start guide
Step 1: Set up your speakers

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit.
1 2 3 4
1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofers are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits. 3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other. 4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit.
Right front presence speaker
Right rear presence speaker
Loosen
Insert
Tighten
Surround right speaker
Surround back right speaker
Front right speaker
Center speaker
For other speaker configurations If you want to connect less than 11 speakers and 2 subwoofers, connect the speakers as follows.
Front left 11.2/11.1 9.2/9.1 7.2/7.1 6.2/6.1 5.2/5.1 3.2/3.1 2.2/2.1 Front right Center Front Front Rear Rear Surround Surround Surround Surround Subwoofer Subwoofer presence presence presence presence left right back left back right left right left right left right
14 En
Quick start guide
Left rear presence speaker
Left front presence speaker
Introduction
Left subwoofer
Right subwoofer
Subwoofer cable Subwoofer cable
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), + (red line) and (white line) properly. Note
Check the impedance of the speaker you are connecting. If the impedance of your speaker is 6-ohm, change the setting of SPEAKER IMP. in Advanced setup (see page 119).
Surround left speaker
Surround back left speaker
Front left speaker
15 En
Quick start guide
Step 2: Connect your Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player and other components
HDMI OUT 1 BD/HD DVD HDMI IN 1
Connect the supplied power cable to AC IN on this unit and then plug the power cable and other components into the AC wall outlet. y
This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) that provide(s) power to other components. See page 38 for details.
HDMI
IN1
OUT 1 BD/HD DVD
AC IN
To the AC wall outlet
AC IN
General connection information

Make sure that this unit and the Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. General information on jacks and cable plugs General information on HDMI Speaker impedance setting P. 28 P. 28 P. 39
Connect an HDMI cable to the HDMI output jack on your Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player and the BD/HD DVD HDMI IN 1 jack of this unit.
AV amplifier Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player
For further connections

Using other kinds of speaker combinations P. 21 Connecting a video monitor via various ways of connection P. 30 Connecting a Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player via various ways of connection P. 31 Connecting a DVD player via various ways of connection P. 32
HDMI output jack HDMI cable
BD/HD DVD HDMI IN 1 jack
Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video recorder P. 33 Connecting a set-top box P. 32
Connect an HDMI cable to the HDMI OUT 1 jack on this unit and the HDMI input jack on your video monitor.
AV amplifier Video monitor
Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder, or a turntable P. 34 Connecting an external amplifier P. 35
Connecting a DVD player via multi-channel analog audio connection P. 35 Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks Using the TRIGGER OUT jacks Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel P. 36 P. 36 P. 36 P. 38 P. 37 P. 37
HDMI input jack
HDMI OUT 1 jack HDMI cable
Connecting this unit to your network Connecting a USB device
16 En
Quick start guide
Step 3: Turn on the power and start playback

Check the type of the connected speakers. If the speakers are 6-ohm speakers, set SPEAKER IMP. to 6 MIN before using this unit (see page 119).
After using this unit...

Introduction Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to the standby mode.
1 2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position on the front panel.
This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby mode, press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or E POWER on the remote control). See page 39 for details. Automatic setup feature To optimize the speaker settings for your listening room, use the automatic setup feature. See pages 43 to 48 for details. Note
After this unit is turned on, it takes approximately 20 seconds until this unit produces sounds, and while Please wait appears in the front panel display, this unit does not accepts the front panel operations and stores the remote control operations. This unit performs the stored remote control operations after Please wait disappears.
Are you enjoying playback?

If there are some troubles with playback, check the settings as follows. No sound is output. Are the speakers connected correctly? Check the speaker connection. Are Your Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player connected correctly? Check the connection of the Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player. Are the front speakers selected correctly? Press G SPEAKERS A or G SPEAKERS B. Is volume setting correct? Adjust the volume level. Does the Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player play back correctly? Check the setting of the Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player. No picture. Is the video monitor connected correctly? Check the connection of the video monitor. If the video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of this unit, is the HDMI OUT SEL setting correct? Set the operation mode selector to F AMP and then press C HDMI OUT repeatedly to set HDMI OUT SEL to OUT 1. Is Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player connected correctly? Check the connection of the video monitor. Is the input source setting of the video monitor correct? Check the setting of the input source of the video monitor. Any other troubles? Refer to Troubleshooting on pages 122 to 127 for other troubles.
Rotate the D INPUT selector to set the input source to BD/HD DVD. y
The recommended sound field program is set for each input source (BD/HD DVD, etc.). You can also use various sound field programs and other sound modes for playback. Refer to the following pages for details: see pages 60 and 72 to use various sound field programs see page 60 to turn on or off the sound effect see page 61 to use the pure direct mode for high fidelity sound
4 5
Start playback of the desired Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD source on your player. Rotate E VOLUME to adjust the volume.
17 En
Quick start guide
What do you want to do with this unit?

Using various input sources
Basic operations of this unit Using your iPod with this unit Enjoying the contents stored on your PC Enjoying Internet radio programs and Podcasts Using USB devices with this unit P. 50 P. 64 P. 66 P. 69 P. 69 Setting the parameters related to the volume level
Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit

Setting the language of the GUI menu Assigning the input/output jacks on this unit P. 81 Setting the parameters for each input source P. 81 P. 86 P. 95
Using various sound features

Using various sound field programs Using the Pure Direct mode for high fidelity sound Adjusting the tonal quality of the speakers Customizing the sound field programs P. 54 P. 61 P. 61 P. 72
Adjusting the tonal quality of each channel manually by using the parametric equalizer P. 87 Adjusting the audio and video synchronization Muting the selected speaker channel Setting the parameters related to the video signals P. 88 P. 89 P. 89
Additional features
Setting the remote control P. 102 Setting the basic speaker configuration Setting the network parameters Setting the parameters of the multi-zone feature Protecting the various settings P. 96 P. 101 P. 51 P. 111 P. 52 Displaying the current input source signal information in the GUI P. 95 Saving and recalling the system settings of this unit (System Memory) Controlling this unit using a Web browser Using headphones Using this unit in multiple rooms simultaneously (multi-zone configuration) Automatically turning off this unit
P. 83 P. 92 P. 92 P. 94
Adjusting the advanced parameters

Setting the speaker impedance of the connected speakers P. 119 Setting the language of the GUI menu P. 120
Setting the video format of the connected video monitor P. 120 Setting the parameters of this unit to default values P. 127
18 En
Preparation
Preparation
Connections ......................................................................................... 20
Rear panel .......................................................................................................................... 20 Placing speakers ................................................................................................................. 21 Connecting speakers .......................................................................................................... 23 Using subwoofers .............................................................................................................. 25 Using presence speakers .................................................................................................... 26 Connecting the speaker cable ............................................................................................ 27 Information on jacks and cable plugs ................................................................................ 28 Information on HDMI .................................................................................................... 28 Audio and video signal flow .............................................................................................. 29 Connecting a TV monitor or projector .............................................................................. 30 Connecting other components ........................................................................................... 31 Connecting the network ..................................................................................................... 37 Connecting the USB storage devices to the USB ports ..................................................... 37 Connecting the power cable ............................................................................................... 38 Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .............................................................. 38 Setting the speaker impedance and language .................................................................... 39 Turning this unit on and off ............................................................................................... 39 Front panel display ............................................................................................................ 40
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)........42

Before starting the automatic setup ................................................................................... 42 Using the quick automatic setup ........................................................................................ 43 Using the basic automatic setup ........................................................................................ 44 Using advanced automatic setup ....................................................................................... 46
Connections
Connections
Rear panel
1 2 3 4 5 6
SPEAKERS
USB
NETWORK
HDMI SPEAKERS
IN1
OUT 1 OUT 2 BD/HD DVD MONITOR OUT
IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
IN4
DVR PR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y BD/ HD DVD PB PR
R
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
1 DVD
S VIDEO 2 DTV
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB
3 CBL/SAT
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
A
ZONE DVD COAXIAL CD-R
B
FRONT PRESENCE /ZONE CBL/SAT VIDEO
C
TRIGGER OUT
L
DVR
1 DVD
AUDIO IN 2 DTV 3 CBL/SAT 4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
AUDIO OUT CD-R 5 VCR
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD-R MD/TAPE CD TUNER PHONO
MD/TAPE
FRONT PRESENCE /ZONE
1
DVD
D
SURROUND
R R
1 FRONT (6CH) CENTER (FRONT) (SINGLE) CBL/SAT
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP 2
L
DVR
(SINGLE) SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP
REMOTE
R
IN (REAR) SUBWOOFER FRONT PRESENCE
4
R
OPTICAL CD GND FRONT B /ZONE EXTRA SP BD/ HD DVD
FRONT B /ZONE
EXTRA SP
1 OUT
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
MULTI CH INPUT AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
FRONT A
IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT 1 CENTER MONITOR OUT 2 Y PB PR
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
Name
1 3 Speaker terminals COMPONENT VIDEO jacks Video component jacks Zone video out jacks DOCK terminal 4 5 6 7 USB port NETWORK port HDMI jacks TRIGGER OUT jack REMOTE IN/OUT jacks 8 9 0 A COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks AC OUTLET(S) VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) MULTI CH INPUT jacks ZONE OUT jacks PRE OUT jacks B C AC IN Audio component jacks Digital audio jacks ZONE DIGITAL OUT jack
Page 23 28 33 28 33 114 36 37 37 28 36 36 30 38 12 35 112 35 38 34 31 113
2 RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details.
20 En
Connections
Placing speakers
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy the CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources.
11.2/11.1 -channel speaker layout

11.2/11.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended for playback the sound of high definition audio formats (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.) as well as the conventional audio sources with sound field programs. See page 23 for connection information. Preparation
FPR FPL
FPL
C
FL FR
FPR
30
FR
SL SR
RSW FL C SR RPR
60
SL
80
SBL SBR
SR
RPL
RPR
30 cm (12 in) or more
Speaker indications
LSW
SL
RPL SBL
SBR
FL/FR: C: SL/SR: SBL/SBR: FPL/FPR: RPL/RPR: LSW/RSW:
Front left/right Center Surround left/right Surround back left/right Front presence left/right Rear presence left/right Left/right subwoofer
Front left and right speakers The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Surround left and right speakers The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Surround back left and right speakers The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions. Front and rear presence left and right speakers See page 26 for details. Left and right subwoofers See page 25 for details. Using di-pole speakers
FL
FR
It is recommended that you use di-pole speakers for surround left and right channels for the accurate playback with the THX surround modes. When you use di-pole speakers, place the surround and surround back speakers as below. Set the distance between surround back speakers rather narrow compared with the conventional speaker layout.
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
: Di-pole speaker : Direction of the di-pole speaker phase
21 En
Connections
7.2/7.1 (or 6.2/6.1) -channel speaker layout

See page 23 for connection information.
5.2/5.1 -channel speaker layout

See page 23 for connection information.
FR FL C LSW SL SBR SBL LSW RSW SR FL C
FR RSW
SR
SL
C
FL FR
Speaker indications Front left/right Center Surround left/right Surround back left/right LSW/RSW: Left/right subwoofer FL/FR: C: SL/SR: SBL/SBR:
FL
C
FR
Speaker indications FL/FR: C: SL/SR: LSW/RSW: Front left/right Center Surround left/right Left/right subwoofer
30
30
SL
SR
SL
SR
60
SL
80
SBL SBR
SR
60
SL
80
SR
30 cm (12 in) or more
Front left and right speakers Center speaker Surround left and right speakers The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as those for the 11.2/11.1-channel speaker layout (see page 21). Surround back left and right speakers The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions. If you use a single surround back speaker, connect the single surround back speaker to the SUR.BACK/BI-AMP (SINGLE) speaker terminal and place the speaker behind the listening position. The surround back left and right channel signals are mixed down and output at the single surround back speaker when you set Surround Back to Small x1 or Large x1 (see page 84). Subwoofer See page 25 for details. y
You can also use the front presence speakers (see page 26) instead of the surround back speakers.
Front left and right speakers Center speaker Subwoofer The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as those for the 11.2/11.1-channel speaker layout (see page 21). Surround left and right speakers Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND speaker terminals even if you place the surround speakers behind the listening position. For the smooth and unbroken sound field behind the listening position, place the surround left and right speakers farther back compared with the placement in the 11.2/11.1-channel speaker layout. The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers when Surround Back is set to None (see page 84). Subwoofer See page 25 for details.
For other speaker combinations You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field programs by using a speaker combination other than the speaker combinations shown above. Use the automatic setup feature (see page 42) or set the Speaker Set parameters in Manual Setup (see page 84) to output the surround sounds at the connected speakers.
22 En
Connections
Connecting speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), + (red line) and (white line) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately. Caution Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 39). Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/ or speakers. Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set SPEAKER IMP. to 6MIN before using this unit (see page 39).
Preparation
Notes
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the + (red line) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the (white line) terminals. You can use the REAR ZONE/PRESENCE, FRONT ZONE/PRESENCE, and/or EXTRA SP speaker terminals for the Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4 speakers (see page 116). You can also use all speaker terminals on this unit for the Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4 speakers (see page 120).
For the 11.2/11.1 (or 9.2/9.1) -channel speaker setting

Right front presence speaker Right rear presence speaker Left rear presence speaker Left front presence speaker
FRONT B speakers
SPEAKERS
USB
NETWORK
HDMI SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
IN4
DVR PR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y BD/ HD DVD PB PR
R
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
1 DVD
S VIDEO 2 DTV 3 CBL/SAT
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
A
B
C
TRIGGER OUT
L
DVR
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
1 DVD
2 DTV 3 CBL/SAT
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
CD-R
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
D
SURROUND
R R
1 +12v 15mA MAX. FRONT (6CH) CENTER (FRONT) (SINGLE) CBL/SAT
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP 2
L
DVR
REMOTE
R
IN (REAR) SUBWOOFER FRONT PRESENCE REAR PRESENCE
4
R
FRONT B /ZONE
EXTRA SP
1 OUT
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
FRONT A
IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
Center speaker
Front right speaker
Front left speaker
Surround back left speaker
23 En
Connections
For the 7.2/7.1 (or 6.2/6.1) -channel speaker setting

FRONT B speakers
+
SURROUND
TRIGGER OUT
L
DVR
1
DVD
+
SURROUND
D
R R
1 +12v 15mA MAX. FRONT (6CH) CENTER (FRONT) (SINGLE)
2
CBL/SAT
L
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP 2
L
DVR
REMOTE
R
4
R
FRONT B /ZONE
EXTRA SP
1 OUT
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
FRONT A
IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
Center speaker
Front right speaker
Front left speaker
Surround back left speaker *
* If you use a single surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the SUR.BACK/BI-AMP (SINGLE) speaker terminal.
For the 5.2/5.1 -channel speaker setting

FRONT B speakers
+
OUT
L
DVR
+
D
DVD
SURROUND
R R
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP 2
L
DVR
REMOTE
R
4
R
FRONT B /ZONE
EXTRA SP
1 OUT
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
FRONT A
IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
Center speaker
Front right speaker
Front left speaker
24 En
Connections
Using subwoofers
The use of subwoofers with built-in amplifiers, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high fidelity sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in digital audio signals. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. You can use one or two subwoofers and select various positions of the subwoofers.
Configuration 1: Front left and right

Set Configuration in Subwoofer to Stereo (see page 85).
Configuration 2: Front and rear

Set Configuration in Subwoofer to Front & Rear (see page 85).
Configuration 3: A single subwoofer

Set Configuration in Subwoofer to Monaural (see page 85).
Preparation
FL LSW SL
FR RSW SR SL
FL
FR FSW SR RSW SL
FL
FR SW SR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
Speaker indications FL/FR: Front left/right C: Center SL/SR: Surround left/right SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right LSW/RSW: Left/right subwoofer
Speaker indications FL/FR: Front left/right C: Center SL/SR: Surround left/right SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right FSW/RSW: Front/rear subwoofer
Speaker indications FL/FR: Front left/right C: Center SL/SR: Surround left/right SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right SW: Subwoofer
Connecting subwoofers
Left (or front) subwoofer y
If you connect a single subwoofer, connect the subwoofer to the left SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks.
DVD
2
CBL/SAT
SURROUND
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
L
DVR
4
R
(REAR) SUBWOOFER FRONT PRESENCE REAR PRESENCE OPTICAL CD GND FRONT B /ZONE EXTRA SP BD/ HD DVD
CENTER
SUR. BACK
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
Right (or rear) subwoofer
25 En
Connections
Using presence speakers

The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front and surround back speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field programs (see page 54). Presence speakers function more effectively when the CINEMA DSP HD mode is active (see page 60). You can adjust the vertical position of dialogues with using the front presence speakers (see page 77). Note
If Front Presence is set to None, the rear presence speakers also do not function and you cannot activate the CINEMA DSP HD mode.
Front presence speakers

0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
Speaker indications
FPL
FPR
1.8 m (6 ft) or higher
FL
FR
FL: FR: C: FPL: FPR:
Front left Front right Center Front presence left Front presence right
*
Rear presence speakers
RPR
RPL
Speaker indications SL: SR: SBL: SBR: RPL: RPR: Surround left Surround right Surround back left Surround back right Rear presence left Rear presence right
SR SBR SBL
SL
*
* Place the rear presence left and right speakers so that the distance between the rear presence left and right speakers is same as the distance between front presence left and right speakers.
26 En
Connections
Connecting the speaker cable

1
Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits.
Connecting the banana plug (China and General models only)

Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.
banana plug
Preparation
10 mm (0.4 in)
Red line: positive (+) White line: negative ()
Loosen the knob.
Using bi-amplification connections

Caution Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers. This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-amplification. To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT A and SUR.BACK/BI-AMP terminals as shown below. To activate the biamplification connections, set BI-AMP to ON in Advanced setup (see page 120).
Red line: positive (+) White line: negative ()
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal.
This unit
+
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP
+
Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

B FRONT B/ ZONE
B FRONT B/ ZONE
EXTRA SP
EXTRA SP FRONT B/ A FRONT A
A
FRONT A
Right Front speakers
Left
Note
When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the shorting bars are put into the terminals of the speakers appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the speakers for details.
27 En
Connections
Information on jacks and cable plugs

Audio jacks and cable plugs
AUDIO
L R
Video jacks and cable plugs

DIGITAL OPTICAL VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR
DIGITAL COAXIAL
(White)
(Red)
(Orange)
(Yellow)
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
PB
PR
Left and right analog audio cable plugs
Coaxial digital audio cable plug
Optical digital audio cable plug
Composite video cable plug
S-video cable plug
Component video cable plugs
Audio jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Note
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connect the video input jacks on this unit to the video output jacks of the input source components to switch the audio and video sources simultaneously. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of Svideo cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. y
This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See pages 29 and 89 for details.
Information on HDMI
HDMI jack and cable plug
This unit has five HDMI input jacks and two HDMI output jacks for digital audio and video signal input/output.
HDMI
See page 139 for the information on the input signal capability of this unit for the HDMI connection. When you set Standby Through in Manual Setup to On, this unit allows the HDMI signals input at an HDMI IN jack to pass through this unit and output at an HDMI OUT jack (see page 94).
Notes
Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jacks on this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. The HDMI OUT jacks output the audio signals input at the HDMI input jacks only when Support Audio is set to Other (see page 94). If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jacks via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to establish the connection to the component. The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be output at the HDMI OUT jacks. Set Conversion to On in Manual Setup (see page 89) to activate this feature. This unit is equipped with two HDMI OUT jacks, however cannot output the video signals to the both HDMI OUT jacks simultaneously. You can select the active HDMI OUT jack. See page 50 for details.
HDMI cable plug
y
We recommend that you use a commercially available HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 95).
28 En
Connections
Audio and video signal flow

Audio signal flow
Input
HDMI
Video signal flow

Output
HDMI
Input
Output
Preparation
DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL)

COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL)
AUDIO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
Notes
2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI input jacks can be output at the HDMI OUT jacks only when Support Audio is set to Other (see page 94). The following types of audio signals can be only input at HDMI input jacks: DSD Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
Through Conversion: On (see page 89)
y
You can deinterlace and convert the resolution of the video signals by using Video parameters. See page 89 for details.
Notes
When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as follows: 1. COMPONENT VIDEO 2. S VIDEO 3. VIDEO This unit is equipped with the two COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks and HDMI OUT jacks. The COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 and 2 outputs the same video signals and you can use both COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks simultaneously. Digital video signals input at the HDMI input jacks cannot be output from analog video output jacks. The analog component video signals (with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution only) are converted to the S-video or composite video signals and output at the VIDEO or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. The GUI signal is not output at the DVR OUT and VCR OUT jacks and is not recorded.
29 En
Connections
Connecting a TV monitor or projector

Connect your TV (or projector) to one of the HDMI OUT jacks, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Notes
This unit is equipped with two HDMI OUT jacks, however cannot output the video signals to the both HDMI OUT jacks simultaneously. You can select the active HDMI OUT jack. Set the operation mode selector to F AMP and then press C HDMI OUT repeatedly. If you connect a video monitor or projector to one of the HDMI OUT jack, connect the component to the HDMI OUT 1 jack. Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly. The GUI menu is not overlaid on the input video image depending on the input video signal format and the setting of the parameters in Wall Paper (see page 91). In this case, the GUI menu appears with the wall paper or gray background. If the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic audio and video synchronization feature (automatic lip sync feature), this unit adjusts the audio and video timing automatically (see page 88). Connect the video monitor to the HDMI OUT jacks on this unit to use the feature.
y
You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. Use the Support Audio parameter in Option to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals (see page 94).
Component video in HDMI in

Y PB PR
Projector
SPEAKERS
USB
NETWORK
HDMI SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
IN4
DVR PR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y BD/ HD DVD PB PR
R
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
S VIDEO 1 DVD 2 DTV 3 CBL/SAT
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
A
B
C
TRIGGER OUT
L
DVR
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
1 DVD
2 DTV 3 CBL/SAT
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
CD-R
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
D
SURROUND
R R
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP 2
L
DVR
REMOTE
R
4
R
FRONT B /ZONE
EXTRA SP
1 OUT
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
FRONT A
IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
PB
PR
HDMI in
Video in
Component video in
S-video in
TV
indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections
30 En
Connections
Connecting other components

Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
When Conversion is set to On (see page 89), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for Optical Input, Optical Output, or Coaxial Input in I/O Assignment (see page 81). If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
Notes
When Conversion is set to Off (see page 89), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 30). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack on this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks.
Preparation
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player

Connect your Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player to the HDMI IN1 jack on this unit to perform the features of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD completely.
Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player Component out Coaxial out
HDMI out
Y PB PR
C
SPEAKERS
USB
NETWORK
HDMI SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
IN4
DVR PR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y BD/ HD DVD PB PR
R
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
A
B
C
TRIGGER OUT
L
DVR
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
1 DVD
2 DTV 3 CBL/SAT
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
CD-R
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
D
SURROUND
R R
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP 2
L
DVR
REMOTE
R
4
R
FRONT B /ZONE
EXTRA SP
1 OUT
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
FRONT A
IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
31 En
Connections
Connecting a DVD player

USB NETWORK HDMI SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
IN4
DVR PR
-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y BD/ HD DVD PB PR
1 DVD
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
A
B
CBL/SAT VIDEO
C
IGGER OUT
L
DVR
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
1 DVD
2 DTV 3 CBL/SAT
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
CD-R
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
D
R R
v A MAX. FRONT (6CH) CENTER (FRONT) (SINGLE)
2
CBL/SAT
SURROUND
L
DVR
MOTE
R
(REAR) SUBWOOFER FRONT PRESENCE REAR PRESENCE
4
R
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y 1 MONITOR OUT 2 PB PR
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
PB
PR
Audio out Component out DVD player
Optical out Coaxial out
Connecting set-top boxes

Component out Satellite receiver or cable TV receiver Optical out
PB
PR
USB
NETWORK
HDMI SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y BD/ HD DVD PB PR
1 DVD
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB PR
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
A
B
CBL/SAT VIDEO
C
R
DVR
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
1 DVD
L
2 DTV 3 CBL/SAT
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
CD-R
D
R R
FRONT (6CH) AX. CENTER (FRONT) (SINGLE)
E
R
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y 1 MONITOR OUT 2 PB PR
AC IN
S-video out
HDTV decoder
32 En
S-video out
HDMI out
Video out
S-video out Audio out
Video out
Audio out
HDMI out
IN4
DVR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
2
CBL/SAT
SURROUND
L
DVR
4
R
6
FRONT A
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
Coaxial out
Video out
Connections
Connecting a DVD recorder
SPEAKERS
USB
NETWORK
HDMI SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
IN4
DVR PR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y BD/ HD DVD PB PR
R
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
A
B
C
TRIGGER OUT
L
DVR
1 DVD
5 VCR
4 DVR
AUDIO IN
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
Preparation
D
SURROUND
R R
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP 2
L
DVR
REMOTE
R
4
R
FRONT B /ZONE
EXTRA SP
1 OUT
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
FRONT A
IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
S-video in
Audio out
Video out
Audio in
Video in
PB
PR
S-video out Component out DVD recorder
HDMI out Optical out
Connecting a VCR
VCR Audio out Video out S-video out S-video in Audio in Video in
TWORK
HDMI
IN1
OUT 1 OUT 2 BD/HD DVD MONITOR OUT S VIDEO 2 DTV 3 CBL/SAT
IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB PR
1 DVD
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
VIDEO
1 DVD
L
5 VCR
4 DVR
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD-R MD/TAPE CD TUNER
R
FRONT (6CH) CENTER (FRONT) (SINGLE)
33 En
Connections
Connecting audio components

Notes
Connect your turntable to the GND terminal on this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some turntables. The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier. When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component, the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
CD recorder Optical in Tuner CD player
Audio out Coaxial out Audio out
Audio out
Audio in
BD/HD DVD
DVD VIDEO Y
CBL/SAT
DVR PR
VIDEO OUT
R
ZONE OUT
MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO PB
5 VCR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
ZONE COAXIAL CD-R
AUDIO OUT
R
AUDIO IN
5 VCR
CD-R
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
2
CBL/SAT
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
L
DVR
4
R
(REAR) SUBWOOFER FRONT PRESENCE REAR PRESENCE OPTICAL CD GND
E4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
PRE OUT
BD/ HD DVD
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
Optical out
Audio out
Audio out
MD recorder or tape deck
Audio in
Ground indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections
Turntable
34 En
Connections
Connecting external amplifiers

This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to use external amplifiers, connect the external amplifiers to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. y
Use the external amplifiers in the following cases: when you want to add more power to the speaker output when you want to use another amplifier for your presence of sounds when you want to enjoy the 11.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with activating the other zones (see page 111)
Notes
When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 50), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. The audio signals input at the CENTER and SUBWOOFER MULTI CH INPUT jacks are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. This unit redirects the audio signals input at the CENTER and/or SUBWOOFER MULTI CH INPUT jacks to the front left and right speaker channels when you set Center and/or Configuration in Speaker Set to None (see page 84). We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1channel speaker system before using this feature.
Preparation
Pre-amplifier mode If you want use the external amplifiers for the all channels in the main zone, set PREAMP MODE to ON in the advanced setup (see page 120). When PREAMP MODE is set to ON, the power consumption is reduced.
For 6-channel input

FRONT (6CH) CENTER
R
SB (8CH) SURROUND SUBWOOFER
3
(FRONT)
4
(SINGLE)
6
L R
MULTI CH INPUT
Subwoofer out
Surround out
Center out
Front out
R
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
PRE OUT
Multi-format player/ External decoder
7
For 8-channel input
PRE OUT jack 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FRONT SURROUND SUBWOOFER SUR.BACK FRONT PRESENCE REAR PRESENCE CENTER Output audio channel
L
Front left/right Surround left/right Subwoofer left/right (see page 25)
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
Surround back left/right * Front presence left/right Rear presence left/right Surround back out Center
L R
R
SB (8CH) SURROUND SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
Subwoofer out
Surround out
Center out
Front out
Note
* When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack.
Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multiformat player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. If you set Input Channels to 8ch in Multi CH Assign (see page 83), you can use the input jacks assigned as Front Input in Multi CH Assign (see page 83) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
Multi-format player/ External decoder
Note
* The analog audio input jacks assigned as Front Input in Multi CH Assign (see page 83).
35 En
Connections
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock

This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable.
Using the TRIGGER OUT jacks

This unit can control the components (for example, the electric screen, projector, etc.) corresponding to the selected input source and activating/deactivating the desired zone. This unit sends the 12 V/15 mA direct electric current at the TRIGGER OUT jacks according to the settings of Trigger Output in Manual Setup (see page 94). Connect one of the TRIGGER OUT jack on this unit and the trigger input jack (or control input jack) of the components with the monaural analog mini cable as follows.
SPEAKERS
IN4
DVR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
ZONE COAXIAL CD-R
TRIGGER OUT
1
TUNER
PHONO
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
2
CBL/SAT
SURROUND
L
DVR
4
R
REAR PRESENCE OPTICAL CD GND FRONT B /ZONE EXTRA SP
CE
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)
BD/ HD DVD
Electric screen, projector, etc.
Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

When the components have the capability of the transmission of the remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote control input and output jacks with the monaural analog mini cable as follows.
* You can connect another component to the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack same as the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack.
Note
The function when you use this feature with the components may vary depending on the components. Refer to the instruction manuals of the connected components.
REMOTE
IN 1 OUT
IN 2 OUT
Remote control in
Remote control out
Controlled component (CD or DVD player, etc.)
Infrared signal receiver or controlling component
* You can connect another set of infrared signal receiver and Yamaha component to the REMOTE IN 2 and OUT 2 jacks same as the REMOTE IN 1 and OUT 1 jacks.
36 En
Connections
Connecting the network

To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the NETWORK port on this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and Yamaha MCX-2000, access the Internet Radio, or control this unit by using your PC, each device must be connected properly in the network. Notes
You must use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable (commercially available) to connect a network hub or router and this unit. If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 92). Yamaha MCX-2000, MCX-A10 and MCX-C15 may not be for sale in same locations.
Internet Yamaha MCX-2000 Yamaha MCX-C15
WAN
Preparation
Yamaha MCX-A10 (with optional speakers)
PC
LAN
Modem
Router
Network cable
NETWORK
Connecting the USB storage devices to the USB ports

This unit is equipped with both the front and rear USB ports. Connect the USB storage device (for example, a high capacity USB hard disk drive) to the front or rear USB port on this unit. Set USB Select in Input Select to Front or Rear to select the active USB port (see page 83). The initial setting of USB Select is Front. The initial setting of USB Select is Front.
(Rear panel)
USB
T/ 2 TONE CONTROL
(Front panel)
PUSH ENTER
HDMI IN
USB
USB storage device USB storage device or USB portable audio player
Notes
We do not guarantee the power supply and operation of all the connected USB devices. See page 69 for more information about the USB storage devices that this unit is supported to.
37 En
Connections
Connecting the power cable

Connecting the AC power cable
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet (AC IN) after all other connections are complete, and then plug the AC power cable into an AC wall outlet.
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. Caution
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections.
AC IN
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
ON
PURE DIRECT
ON/OFF
OFF
INPUT
STRAIGHT ZONE CONTROLS
PROGRAM
MENU
VOLUME
ZONE ON/OFF
MULTI ZONE
TONE CONTROL
PUSH ENTER
SILENT CINEMA
YPAO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
USB
PHONES
OPTIMIZER MIC
VIDEO AUX
To the AC wall outlet

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
HDMI IN
AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. model ............................................................ 1 outlet Korea model .............................................................. None Other models .........................................................2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see Specifications on page 138.
S V
S-Video output
Optical output
HDMI output
Audio output
Game console or video camera
Video output
Recommended Alternative
38 En
Connections
Setting the speaker impedance and language

Caution If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, set SPEAKER IMP. to 6MIN as follows BEFORE using this unit. Before using this unit, set the speaker impedance of the connected speakers and the language of the menu items and messages.
Press B MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.
Turning this unit on and off

Turning on this unit
Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. When you turn on this unit by pressing B MASTER ON/OFF, the main zone is turned on. Note
After this unit is turned on, it takes approximately 20 seconds until this unit produces sounds, and while Please wait appears in the front panel display, this unit does not accepts the front panel operations and stores the remote control operations. This unit performs the stored remote control operations after Please wait disappears.
Preparation
1 2
Make sure this unit is turned off. Press and hold I PROGRAM on the front panel and then press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. Press and hold I PROGRAM until ADVANCED SETUP appears in the front panel display.
PROGRAM
While holding down

MASTER
PUSH ENTER
Turning off this unit

Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Notes
A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as E POWER and D STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when B MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. Basically, we recommend that you use the standby mode to turn off this unit.
ADVANCED SETUP
Rotate I PROGRAM to select SPEAKER IMP.. Press I PROGRAM repeatedly to select 8MIN or 6MIN. Rotate I PROGRAM to select LANGUAGE. Press I PROGRAM repeatedly to select the desired language setting. Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese), FRENCH (French), GERMAN (German), SPANISH (Spanish), RUSSIAN (Russian)
3 4 5 6
Set the main zone to the standby mode

Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or D STANDBY) to set the main zone to the standby mode. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control.
Turning on the main zone from the standby mode

Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or E POWER) to turn on the main zone. y
When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few seconds before this unit can reproduce sound. These buttons are operational only when B MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.
Notes
You can also select the language setting by using GUI menu. See page 95 for details. Some languages are not displayed in the front panel display or Zone OSD. LANGUAGE RUSSIAN JAPANESE Other languages The selected language is displayed. The selected language is not displayed. The menu items and messages are displayed in English. GUI menu Front panel display Zone OSD
If there are some problems... First, turn off and then turn on this unit again. If problems persist, initialize the parameters of this unit. See page 127 for details.
39 En
Connections
Front panel display

1 2 3 4 5 6
RECOUT
AAC DSD PCM MP3 WMA
NET V-AUX USB DOCK

F R
VCR HD
96
DVR CBL SAT DTV
DVD BD HD DVD
MD CD-R TAPE
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH
TUNER
SLEEP
dB VOLUME
LFE L C R FPR SL SR RPR SBL SB SBR
t 24 q TRUE HD q DIGITAL PLUS MASTER AUDIO q PL x q EX MATRIX DISCRETE

HD 3 PRE AMP VIRTUAL SILENT SP YPAO ENHANCER CINEMA A B
ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4
7 A B C D E
8 9
0
96
t 24 q TRUE HD q DIGITAL PLUS MASTER AUDIO q PL x q EX MATRIX DISCRETE

HD HD 3 PRE AMP VIRTUAL SILENT YPAO ENHANCER CINEMA
H I F G J
SLEEP
dB VOLUME
LFE L C R FPR SL SR RPR SBL SB SBR
ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4
1 RECOUT indicator Lights up when this unit is in the recording input source selecting mode (see page 62). 2 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at one of the HDMI input jacks (see page 28). HDMI indicator also lights up when Standby Through is set to On and this unit is in the standby mode (see page 94). 3 Front/rear USB port indicator Lights up according to the setting of USB Select (see page 83). F: Front USB port is selected. R: Rear USB port is selected. 4 Battery charge indicator Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod in the standby mode of this unit (see page 64). 5 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. Note
NET indicator also lights up when NET STANDBY in Advanced setup is set to YES and this unit is in the standby mode (see page 119).
8 SP A B indicators Lights up according to the set of front speakers activated (see page 51). SP A: The FRONT A speakers are activated. SP B: The FRONT B speakers are activated. SP A B: The FRONT A and B speakers are activated. 9 Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 51). 0 Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. A Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit function. B DSP indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound field programs are selected. CINEMA DSP HD indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 54). HD indicator Lights up when the CINEMA DSP HD mode is active (see page 60). C VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is active (see page 60).
6 Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active sound fields (see page 54). 7 Input signal indicators The respective indicator lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct Stream Digital), PCM (Pulse Code Modulation), WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), or AAC (MPEG-4 AAC) audio signals.
40 En
Connections
D YPAO indicator Lights up when you run Auto Setup and when the speaker settings set in Auto Setup are used without any modifications (see page 42). E ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is selected (see page 59). F PRE AMP indicator Lights up when this unit is in the pre-amplifier mode (see page 120). G SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 60). H SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 52). I VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. y
When the audio output is muted, the VOLUME level indicator flashes (see page 50).
Preparation
J Input channel and speaker indicators

Input channel indicators Presence speaker indicators
LFE
R SR
FPR SL
RPR SBL SB SBR

Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. Light up or flash according to the settings of the speakers when this unit is in the auto setup procedure (see page 42) or the speaker level setting procedure in the Speaker Level (see page 86). Presence speaker indicators Light up according to setting for Front Presence and Rear Presence (see page 84) in Speaker Set when this unit is in the auto setup procedure (see page 42) or the speaker level setting procedure in the Speaker Level (see page 86). y
You can make settings for the presence and surround back speakers automatically by running Auto Setup (see page 42) or manually by adjusting settings for Front Presence, Rear Presence (see page 84), and Surround Back (see page 84) in Speaker Set.
K ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 indicators Lights up when Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 is turned on (see page 111).
41 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. This unit is equipped with various automatic setup features. You can select the automatic setup features according to your preference. Quick automatic setup Use this feature to carry out the automatic setup quickly. You can optimize the basic parameters of the sound in the listening room automatically. P. 43
Before starting the automatic setup

Make sure of the following check points before starting the automatic setup operations. Speakers are connected appropriately. Headphones are disconnected from this unit. This unit is turned on. The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume level is set to about half way (or slightly less). The crossover frequency controls of the connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.
VOLUME CROSSOVER HIGH CUT
Basic automatic setup Use this feature to customize the automatic setup and review the result of the measurements. You can set the parameters that this unit sets in the automatic setup procedure and review the results of the measurements. P. 44
MIN MAX MIN MAX
Controls of a subwoofer (example)
Notes
If you use the external amplifiers (see page 35), the amplifiers are turned on and the settings are appropriate. The room is sufficiently quiet. Set the operation mode selector on the remote control to F AMP.
Advanced automatic setup Use this feature to make fine-adjustments of the sound. You can optimize the setup of this unit for multiple listening positions in a listening room, and/or for the effect of the sound field programs. P. 46
Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the automatic setup procedure. To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the automatic setup procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.
Notes
Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may notice irregular results when setting the level and/or distance of the main speakers. If this happens, THX Ltd. recommends setting them manually. Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and the interaction with the room, THX Ltd. recommends setting the level and the distance of the subwoofer manually.
42 En
Using the quick automatic setup

Use this feature to optimize the sound of this unit to the listening room quickly.
Before proceeding next operation Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the automatic setup procedure immediately. For more accurate measurements, we recommend that you move to the wall where speakers are not around. Press I PROGRAM on the front panel to start the measurements. This unit starts the measurements immediately. Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the automatic setup procedure. During the setup procedure, following messages appear in the front panel display.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. MIC ON appears in the front panel display.
STRAIGHT
Preparation
PROGRAM
MENU
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
TONE CONTROL
PUSH ENTER
SILENT CINEMA
YPAO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
USB
PHONES
OPTIMIZER MIC
VIDEO AUX
Omni-directional microphone
AUTO SETUP PREPARING
AUTO SETUP ENTER TO START

Note
If GUI appears in the front panel display as follows, the menu screen (GUI) is displayed in the video monitor and you cannot proceed the quick automatic setup. In such a case, press J MENU to turn off the GUI or use the basic automatic setup procedure (see page 44).
AUTO SETUP MEASURING
AUTO SETUP ANALIZING

y
To cancel the automatic setup procedure, rotate E VOLUME.
GUI DSP-Z11
Notes
During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. Keep quiet when you leave the room. The necessary time for the automatic setup procedure may differ depending on the environment of the listening room and connected speakers (from 30 seconds to 5 minutes).
Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward.
Optimizer microphone
Once this unit completes all measurements and adjustments successfully, following message appears in the front panel display.
COMPLETED PLS UNPLUG MIC

If error or warning message appears... Error message appears in the front panel display. See the Auto Setup section in Troubleshooting on page 126 for a complete list of error messages and proper remedies. y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.).
ERROR: E-01 PRESS ENTER

y
You can check the detailed results of the measurements by using the video monitor. See page 45 for details.
43 En
Disconnect the optimizer microphone to exit from the automatic setup mode. The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.
Measurement Multi Measure (Multiple point measurement) Wiring (Speaker wiring) Distance (Speaker distance) Size (Speaker size) Equalizing (Speaker equalizing)
Descriptions
You can make adjustments of this unit for multiple listening positions. For details, refer to Using advanced automatic setup on page 46. In the basic automatic setup, leave the setting to the default. This unit checks and adjusts which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. This unit checks and adjusts the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. This unit checks and adjusts the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel. Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the crucial frequency bands for the listening room and adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to create a cohesive sound field in the room. This unit checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. Standing waves are the sound waves generated in a room due to the acoustic characteristics of the room and audio system, etc., and the acoustic standing waves may interrupt the accurate reproduction of the source sound and distort the characteristics of the sound produced by this unit. This unit reduces the effects of the standing waves in the listening with the specially customized parametric equalizer. For details, refer to Using advanced automatic setup on page 46. In the basic automatic setup, clear the check mark.
Using the basic automatic setup

Use this feature to customize the measurements and the settings of the automatic setup using the connected video monitor.
1 2
Turn on the connected video monitor. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to this unit and then place the microphone appropriately. Refer to the steps 1 and 2 of Using the quick automatic setup on page 43. Press I MENU on the remote control. Following menu screen appears in the video monitor.
Information Setup Menu Start Start:ENTER
Level (Speaker level) Standing Wave (Standing wave cancelling)
Angle (Speaker angle)
Press 9 k to select Setup Menu and then 9 h. The list of the measurements in the automatic setup appears in the screen. Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the desired measurement item and then press 9 ENTER repeatedly to select whether the selected measurement is carried out. Check mark appears in the check box of the measurement that this unit carries out.
Note
When you use THX speakers, clear the check mark of Size and then make sure that Small or Small x2 are selected in Speaker Set (see page 84).
Once you have finished the settings, press 9 l to return to the previous menu level and then press 9 n to select Start. Press 9 ENTER to start the measurements. This unit starts the measurements immediately. Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the automatic setup procedure. Notes
During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. Keep quiet when you leave the room. The necessary time for the automatic setup procedure may differ depending on the environment of the listening room and connected speakers (from 30 seconds to 5 minutes).
y
To cancel the automatic setup procedure, press 0 RETURN. The error message E09:User Cancel appears in the menu screen and this unit stops the measurement immediately (see page 45).
44 En
Reviewing the result of the automatic setup

Once all measurement items are set successfully, following display appears in the menu screen.
Angle Check Angle Result
Exit Setup Measurement Over Successfully Retry Detail
Use this feature to review the result of the automatic setup.
1 2
Set the operation mode selector to F AMP and then press I MENU to turn on the GUI screen. Press 9 k / n repeatedly and then 9 h to select Auto Setup. Preparation
Input Select
In this menu, you can perform the following operations: Press 9 n and select Setup to set the measured values. Press 9 k and select Retry to retry the automatic setup procedure. This unit starts the automatic setup procedure immediately again. Press 9 h and select Detail to view information about measurement results and warning messages. In the information display, press 9 k / n repeatedly to toggle between the parameters. See page 46 for details. Press 9 l to cancel the measurement results and exit from the automatic setup menu. If error or warning messages appear...
Exit Setup Measurement Over W1:Out of Phase W3:Level Error Retry Detail
Manual Setup Auto Setup System Memory Signal Info. Information Setup Menu Start
Press 9 k to select Information.
Information Setup Menu Start
Multi Measure Wiring Distance
Press 9 h and then 9 k / n repeatedly to select the desired check items.

Left Right NRM NRM NRM NRM NRM NRM NRM NRM NRM NRM NRM DET DET
Error or warning messages
Multi Measure Wiring Distance Size
When this unit detects potential problems during the automatic setup procedure, error or warning messages appears in the result display. See the Auto Setup section in Troubleshooting on page 126 for a complete list of error or warning messages and proper remedies. Press 9 l to view the detailed information of the error or warning messages. Press I MENU to turn off the GUI menu.
Front Center Sur. S.Back F.PRNS R.PRNS SubWfr
Reload:ENTER
Notes
After you have completed the automatic setup procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.
45 En
Measurement Multi Measure (Multiple point measurement) Wiring (Speaker wiring)
Descriptions
Displays the number of the points the measurements are carried out at. For details, refer to Using advanced automatic setup on this page. Displays the polarity of each connected speaker. NRM appears when the polarity of the connected speaker is normal. REV appears when the polarity of the connected speaker is reversed. DET appears when this unit detects the subwoofer(s) is connected. appears when no speaker is connected to the corresponding speaker channel. Displays the speaker distance from the listening position. Press 9 h repeatedly to switch the unit to display the value of the each speaker distance. Displays the size of the connected speakers and the bass cross over frequency (Cross). LRG appears when the connected speaker has the ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively. SML appears when the connected speaker does not have the ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively. Displays the result of the adjustment of the frequency responses of each connected speaker. You can switch the parametric equalizer type that appears in the result display by pressing 9 h repeatedly in the Equalizing result display. To apply the result that is displayed in the display, press 9 ENTER. Choices: Natural, Flat, Front Select Natural to average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the Flat setting sounds a little harsh. Select Flat to average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. Select Front to adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. Displays the result of the adjustment of each connected speaker output level. You can display the result of the adjustment of the speaker level for each parametric equalizer type (see above) by pressing 9 h repeatedly. Select Through to display the result when this unit does not use the parametric equalizer. Displays the active band frequencies of the special parametric equalizer for each speaker. Press 9 h repeatedly to switch the result of the front and rear speaker. Displays the angles of the front speakers, surround speakers, front presence speakers and rear presence speakers at the measured point.
Notes
appears when no speaker is connected to the corresponding speaker channel or this unit does not measure the corresponding speaker channel yet. If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run Auto Setup again to recalibrate your system. The distances displayed in the Distance results may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer or external amplifiers if you connect them. In the Equalizing results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. Even if you change the setting of PEQ Select, the equalizer type that is displayed in Equalizing is not changed.
Distance (Speaker distance) Size (Speaker size)
Once you finish the review of the result of the automatic setup, press 9 l repeatedly to exit from the automatic setup menu.
y
You can also set the parametric equalizer type by using Parametric EQ in Manual Setup (see page 87). You can set the connected subwoofer phases by using Phase in Manual Setup (see page 85).
Equalizing (Speaker equalizing)
Using advanced automatic setup

You can use the multiple-point measurement feature to optimize up to eight listening positions in a listening room and speaker angle measurement feature to optimize the speakers for the effects of the sound field programs. Notes
Before starting the operations, prepare the supplied microphone base. You can make fine adjustments of this unit by using the multiple-point measurement and speaker angle measurement features, however it takes from 30 seconds to 3 minutes to make the measurements at each listening point.
Level (Speaker level)
The following listening room is set as the example in the following instructions.
Standing Wave (Standing wave cancelling) Angle (Speaker angle)
1 2
34 5
7 6
y
You can reload the displayed result of the automatic setup by pressing 9 ENTER. The results of the measurement that are the causes of the warning message(s) appear in red.
1/2/3/4/5/6/7: Listening positions
1 2
Turn on the connected video monitor. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to this unit and then place the microphone appropriately. Refer to the steps 1 and 2 of Using the quick automatic setup on page 43. First, place the optimizer microphone to the listening position 1.
46 En
Press I MENU on the remote control. Following menu screen appears in the video monitor.
Information Setup Menu Start Start:ENTER
11
Press 9 ENTER to start the measurement at the next listening position. y

To skip the measurements at the remaining listening positions, press 9 n.
12 13
Repeat steps 10 and 11 until the measurements at all listening points are completed. Once following display appears in the video monitor, place the supplied microphone base at the listening point you want to be seated most frequently as follows. Make sure that the arrow mark on the microphone base points the center speaker or between the front left and right speakers.
Equalizing Level Angle Check Angle Result
3
Preparation
Press 9 k to select Setup Menu and then 9 h. The list of the measurements in the automatic setup appears in the screen. Press 9 k repeatedly to select Multi Measure. Press 9 h and then 9 k / n repeatedly to set the number of the listening positions you want to make the measurement at. Choices: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
5 6
Put the microphone at 1st listening position Next:ENTER

1
Information Setup Menu Start

Multi Measure Wiring Distance
7 8
Press 9 l to return to the previous menu level and then press 9 n repeatedly to select Angle. Make sure that a check mark appears in the check box of Angle. If the check mark does not appears, press 9 ENTER to select the check box. Once you have finished the settings, press 9 l to return to the previous menu level and then press 9 n to select Start. This unit starts the measurement procedure. See page 44 for details. Once this unit pauses the automatic measurement procedure and then Put the microphone at 2nd listening position appears in the display, move the optimizer microphone to the listening position 2.
FRONT DIRECTION
Microphone base
Note
For the accurate measurements of the speaker angles, we strongly recommend that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the microphone base at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the microphone base to the tripod (etc.).
14
Place the optimizer microphone to the (1) position on the microphone base.
10
Pre Check Main Check Wiring Distance
Put the microphone at 2nd listening position Next:ENTER Skip:
47 En
15
Once the setting has been completed, press 9 ENTER. This unit starts the measurements of the speaker angles. Once the following display appears in the video monitor, move the optimizer microphone to the (2) position on the microphone base.
For other configuration of the listening position The following examples indicate the measurement points when there is a listening position or are two listening positions. Example 1: Two listening positions We recommend that you make measurements in front of and behind the listening positions as well as the listening positions.
16
3 1 4
Example 2: One listening position We recommend that you make measurements around the listening position as well as the listening position.

3
Put the microphone at 2nd listening position Next:ENTER

1
17 18
Press 9 ENTER to resume the measurements. Once the following display appears in the video monitor, move the optimizer microphone to the (3) position on the microphone base.
5
4 1 2 3

3
Put the microphone at 3rd listening position Next:ENTER

1
19 20
Press 9 ENTER to resume the measurements. Once the measurement procedure has been complete, following display appears in the video monitor. See page 45 for details.
Exit Setup Measurement Over Successfully Retry Detail
48 En
Basic Operation
Basic Operation
Playback ................................................................................................ 50
Basic procedure ................................................................................................................. 50 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component ................................................................... 50 Selecting the HDMI OUT jack .......................................................................................... 51 Selecting the front speaker set ........................................................................................... 51 Using your headphones ...................................................................................................... 51 Playing video sources in the background of an audio source ............................................ 51 Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) ................................................................ 52 Muting the audio output .................................................................................................... 52 Using the sleep timer ......................................................................................................... 52 Operating this unit by using the graphical user interface (GUI) menu .............................. 53
Sound field programs .......................................................................... 54

Selecting sound field programs ......................................................................................... 54 Sound field program descriptions ...................................................................................... 54 Using CINEMA DSP HD mode ....................................................................................... 60 Enjoying unprocessed input sources .................................................................................. 60
Using audio features ............................................................................ 61

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound .................................................................................................. 61 Adjusting the tonal quality ................................................................................................ 61 Adjusting the speaker level ................................................................................................ 61
Recording ............................................................................................. 62
Playback
Playback
Caution Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. y
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set Decoder Mode in Input Select to DTS before playback (see page 82).
Rotate E VOLUME (or press J VOLUME +/) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. Control range: Mute, 80.0 dB (minimum) to +16.5 dB (maximum) y
See page 61 to adjust the level of each speaker.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to F AMP.
Rotate the I PROGRAM selector (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons (Q ) repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the short message display. See page 54 for details about sound field programs.
Currently selected sound field program category
Basic procedure
1
Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. y
If you connect two video monitors to the HDMI OUT jacks of this unit, press C HDMI OUT repeatedly to select the active video monitor. You can control this unit by using the graphical user interface (GUI) screen. See page 53 for details. You can turn on or off the short message displays in the video monitor. See page 90 for details.
Movie Sci-Fi
Currently selected sound field program
Note
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 50).
Rotate the D INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons (3 )) to select the desired input source. The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display and in the short message display for a few seconds.
Available input sources
y
Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component

Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 35) as the input source. Rotate the D INPUT selector (or press 3 MULTI) to select MULTI CH. y
Use MULTI CH menu in Input Select to set the parameters for MULTI CH (see page 83).
NET V-AUX USB DOCK
VCR
DVR CBL SAT DTV
DVD BD HD DVD
MD TAPE CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH
TUNER
DVD
Currently selected input source
Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. Refer to the instruction manuals for the source component. See page 66 for details about playback of Internet Radio programs and the music contents in the PC or USB storage devices.
Note
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 54).
50 En
Playback
Selecting the HDMI OUT jack

Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack to output the input signals. Press C HDMI OUT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired setting of HDMI OUT SEL. Each time you press C HDMI OUT, the front panel display changes as shown below.
Using your headphones

Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel.
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
ON
PURE DIRECT
ON/OFF
OFF
OUT 1 OFF
Choice OUT 1 OUT 2 OFF Functions
OUT 2
INPUT
PRESET/TUNING EDIT ZONE ON/OFF ZONE CONTROLS SEARCH MODE REC OUT/ ZONE 2
PROGRAM
MENU
VOLUME
MULTI ZONE
TONE CONTROL
PUSH ENTER
SILENT CINEMA
YPAO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
USB
PHONES
OPTIMIZER MIC
VIDEO AUX
Basic Operation
Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 jack. Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack. Does not output any signals at the HDMI OUT 1 and 2 jacks. Select this setting when you do not use the video monitor connected to one of the HDMI OUT jacks.
Selecting the front speaker set

Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT A and/or FRONT B) on or off. Press G SPEAKERS A and/or G SPEAKERS B on the front panel to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or EXTRA SP speaker terminals. Note
Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front speaker setting.
When you select a sound field program, the SILENT CINEMA mode activates automatically (see page 60).
Notes
When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. All digital multi-channel audio signals (except DSD signals) are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. If you connect or disconnect your headphones to or from this unit in the party mode, the sounds in the zones that join in the party mode are muted for a moment. The audio signals input at the CENTER and SUBWOOFER MULTI CH INPUT jacks are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels.
Using the Zone B feature

When you set Speaker B to ZoneB (see page 91), you can use the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals in another room (Zone B). Press G SPEAKERS B on the front panel repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers. When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in the main room are muted. Note
You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers simultaneously.
Playing video sources in the background of an audio source

You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source in the video monitor. Press the input selector buttons (3 ) to select a video source and then an audio source.
MULTI BD HD DVD CBL SAT TUNER V-AUX PHONO MD TAPE CD-R
DVD
CD
DTV
DVR NET USB
VCR
DOCK
: Audio source buttons : Video source buttons
y
Set the BGV parameter in the MULTI CH menu to the desired setting to select the default background video input source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 83).
51 En
Playback
Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch the input jack assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are assigned to an input source. y
We recommend setting the audio input jack select to AUTO in most cases. You can adjust the default the audio input jack select of this unit by using Audio Select in Option (see page 93). You can also set the audio input jack select setting in Audio Select in Input Select (see page 82).
Using the sleep timer

Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 38).
1 2
Press one of the input selector buttons (3 ) on the remote control to select the desired input source. Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. Press C SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press C SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below.
120min. OFF 30min. 90min. 60min.
Rotate the D INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons (3 )) to select the desired input source. Press F AUDIO SELECT (or O AUDIO SEL) repeatedly to select the desired Audio input jack select setting.
Available input sources
NET V-AUX USB DOCK VCR DVR CBL SAT DTV DVD BD HD DVD MD TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER
A.SEL:
AUTO
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program.
Currently selected Audio input jack select setting
AUTO
Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital signals (3) Analog signals Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not input, no sound is output. Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack. When no signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output.
SLEEP 120min.
SLEEP
Flashes
HDMI COAX/OPT
STRAIGHT
SLEEP
Lights up
ANALOG
Canceling the sleep timer

Press C SLEEP repeatedly until OFF appears in the front panel display.
Note
This feature is not available when no digital input jack (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. Use I/O Assignment in Input Select to reassign the respective input jack (see page 81).
Muting the audio output

Press L MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press L MUTE again to resume the audio output. VOLUME flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted. y
You can also rotate E VOLUME on the front panel or press J VOLUME +/ on the remote control to resume the audio output. You can adjust the muting level by using the Muting Type parameter in Volume (see page 86).
SLEEP OFF
Disappears
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and OFF disappears from the front panel display after a few seconds. y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or D STANDBY) to set the main zone to the standby mode. You can also set the sleep timer for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4. See page 117 for details.
52 En
Playback
Operating this unit by using the graphical user interface (GUI) menu
This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. You can also set up this unit using the GUI menu (see page 74).
Items in GUI menu

Currently selected decoder
Currently selected input source
DVD
qPLIIx Movie
Sound Video
3D
Sci-Fi
Currently selected sound field program
Stereo/Surround Input Select

Currently selected menu item
Basic Operation
Manual Setup Auto Setup System Memory
Basic Multi Zone Network
Menu area
Manual Setup
Current menu directory
-40.0dB
Volume level (see page 50)
y
Set the operation mode selector to F AMP when you operate this unit by using GUI menu. See page 74 for details about the contents in the menu area. This unit reserves the previously selected GUI menu.
Basic controls in the GUI menu

Button 9 Cursor k / n 9 Cursor h 9 Cursor l 9 ENTER I MENU Function
Selects the item in the current menu level. Selects the currently selected menu item and moves to the next menu level. Returns to the previous menu level. Selects the currently selected menu item and moves to the next menu level. Turns on or off the GUI menu.
Basic operation of the GUI menu by using the front panel controls
I PROGRAM Turn left/right Press Function
Selects the item in the current menu level. Selects the currently selected menu item and moves to the next menu level.
Button J MENU Ll Mh
Functions
Turns on or off the GUI menu. Returns to the previous menu level. Selects the currently selected menu item and moves to the next menu level.
53 En
Sound field programs

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y
The Yamaha CINEMA DSP sound field program are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Surround, Dolby TrueHD, and DTS-HD sources. The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.
Selecting sound field programs

Rotate the I PROGRAM selector (or set the operation mode selector to F AMP and then press one of the sound field selector buttons (Q ) repeatedly). The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the short message display. Notes
When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 50) or when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode (see page 61). Sampling frequencies higher than 96 kHz are sampled down to 96 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.
y
You can select the desired sound field programs and setting the parameters by using GUI menu. See page 77 for details.
Sound field program descriptions

y
Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
Name of the program CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP Created sound fields
Characteristics of the program (see page 55)
Size This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science V/H balance fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of F/R balance cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between Atmosphere dialog, sound effects and background music.
Sci-Fi
Small Vertical Front Simple
Large Horizontal Rear Complex
Program description
Sound field indicators

Presence sound field Listening position Surround left sound field Surround back sound field Surround right sound field
y
When the CINEMA DSP HD mode is active (see page 60), the HD sound field indicators light up. HD sound field
indicators
Note
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
54 En
Descriptions of the characteristics of the sound field programs

Following indexes indicates the characteristics and trends of each sound field program. Note
The characteristics of the sound field programs may differ depending on the settings of the listening room, etc.
Size of sound field space (Size) (For the HiFi DSP and CINEMA DSP programs)
Small Large
Sound field atmosphere (Atmosphere) (For the HiFi DSP programs)

Simple Complex
Indicates the size of the sound field to be generated. If the value for this item is small, the sound is that of a small space, while if the value is large, the sound is that of a vast space. Vertical/horizontal balance (V/H balance) (For the HiFi DSP and CINEMA DSP programs)
Vertical Horizontal
Indicates the balance of the vertical (height) and horizontal directions for the sound field to be generated. If this item is more in (For the CINEMA DSP programs) the horizontal direction, the sound is that of a space with strong reflections from the walls, while if it is more in the vertical direction, Calm Powerful the sound is that of a space with strong reflections from the ceiling. The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to whether it is nearer to one or the other of the following; Calm: An overall composed, moderate effect, stressing the overall Front/rear balance (F/R balance) quality of the atmosphere without aiming at any extreme effects. (For the CINEMA DSP programs only) This suits almost all contents relatively well, but provides little Front Rear showiness or powerfulness. A CINEMA DSP sound field processing expressing whether the Powerful: Designed with specific contents in mind (expressing vast effect is stronger towards the front or rear. When the effect is spaces, feverish excitement, etc.). This is extremely effective for the stronger towards the front, the listener senses a feeling of openness right contents, but is suited for a smaller range of contents. and depth towards the screen, while when the effect is stronger towards the rear, the listener gets a sense of envelopment and movement. Suits basically all types of contents for programs with a good front/rear balance, and is effective when selected appropriately for programs in which the balance is more towards either the front or rear.
The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to whether it is nearer to one or the other of the following; Simple: Sounds that fade straight-forwardly, with a light, gentle impression, depending on the program. This suits almost all contents relatively well, but provides little brilliance or powerfulness. Complex: Sounds transform in complex ways as they fade out, with a rich, brilliant impression, depending on the program. This is extremely effective for the right contents, but is suited for a smaller range of contents.
Basic Operation
For audio music sources

y
For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 61), the STRAIGHT mode (see page 60), or surround decode mode (see page 72).
CLASSICAL 1 1
CLASSICAL 1
Hall in Munich A
HiFi DSP
Size V/H balance Atmosphere
Small Vertical Simple
Large Horizontal Complex
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listeners virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Munich B
HiFi DSP
This hall is frequently used for recording orchestral music, and is a shoe-box type concert hall with around 1300 seats. The hall is constructed from marble, resulting in relatively flat resonance. Further, the high ceiling causes sound to reverberate for longer than usual.
Hall in Frankfurt
HiFi DSP
This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with around 2400 seats located in Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listeners virtual seat is in the center-right section on the first floor.
55 En
Hall in Stuttgart
HiFi DSP
This is a large asymmetrical concert hall with around 2000 seats located in downtown Stuttgart. Sound reflected off the concrete wall located to the left of listeners has a powerful presence.
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP
This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
Hall in Amsterdam
HiFi DSP
Size V/H balance
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2200 around the circle stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
CLASSICAL 2 2
Atmosphere
CLASSICAL 2
Hall in USA A
HiFi DSP
This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a fairly traditional European design. The interior is relatively simple, in the American style. The middle and high frequencies are richly and beautifully reinforced.
Hall in USA B
HiFi DSP
This spacious arch-shaped hall has a dome ceiling and can seat 2600. The ample resonance apparent in the sound is a feature brought about by longer than average period of reverberation. In addition to this, the reflector suspended above the stage allows listeners to experience rich sound from the direction of the stage.
Chamber
HiFi DSP
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
Church in Tokyo
HiFi DSP
The acoustic environment of an ordinary church with moderate reverberations. The reverberation lasts 2.5 seconds. This is ideal for reproducing church organ and choral music.
Church in Freiburg
HiFi DSP
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the church.
Church in Royaumont
HiFi DSP
Size V/H balance
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris.
LIVE/CLUB 3
Atmosphere
LIVE/CLUB
Village Gate
HiFi DSP
Size V/H balance
Small Vertical Simple Small Vertical Simple
Large Horizontal Complex Large Horizontal Complex
This is the sound field at a jazz club that was in New York. It is in a basement and has a relatively spacious floor area. The listeners virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
Atmosphere Size V/H balance
Village Vanguard
HiFi DSP
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the corner.
Atmosphere
56 En
The Bottom Line
HiFi DSP
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
Cellar Club
HiFi DSP
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
HiFi DSP
Size V/H balance
Small Vertical Simple Small Vertical Simple Small Vertical Simple
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listeners virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
Basic Operation
Warehouse Loft
HiFi DSP
Large Horizontal Complex Large Horizontal Complex
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.
Arena
HiFi DSP
This is the sound field of a large arena, with just the right sense of distance from the stage. A dynamic sound field reproduces the power of live performances.
Atmosphere
For various sources

ENTERTAIN 4
ENTERTAIN
Size V/H balance F/R balance Atmosphere Small Vertical Front Calm Large Horizontal Rear Powerful
Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.
For visual sources of music

ENTERTAIN 4
ENTERTAIN
Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices. Recital/Opera offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
Size V/H balance F/R balance Atmosphere
Small Vertical Front Calm
Large Horizontal Rear Powerful
Pavilion
This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the spaciousness of a pavilion. Reverberation, which is somewhat delayed, reproduces the live acoustics unique to a pavilion, and helps to make concert scenes more exciting.
57 En
For parties
ENTERTAIN 4
ENTERTAIN
Disco
HiFi DSP
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-energy, immediate sound.
For game programs

ENTERTAIN 4
ENTERTAIN
Action Game
This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions.
Roleplaying Game
This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field design used with Action Game to represent the depth and spatial feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game.
For movie sources

y
You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except Mono Movie). See page 72 for details.
MOVIE 5
MOVIE
Size V/H balance F/R balance Atmosphere Size V/H balance F/R balance Atmosphere Size V/H balance F/R balance Atmosphere Small Vertical Front Calm Small Vertical Front Calm Small Vertical Front Calm Large Horizontal Rear Powerful Large Horizontal Rear Powerful Large Horizontal Rear Powerful
Standard
This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
Spectacle
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.
Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum spatial feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.
58 En
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth.
Stereo playback
STEREO 6
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.
Basic Operation
11ch Stereo
HiFi DSP
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
For compression artifacts (Compressed Music Enhancer mode)

ENHANCER 7
ENHANCER
Straight Enhancer
Use this program to improve the sound enhancer nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel compression artifacts.
11ch Enhancer
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 11-channel stereo.
Surround decoder mode

SUR. DECODE 8
SUR. DECODE
Surround Decode
Use this program to play back sources with using the desired surround decoders.
THX Surround mode

THX Use this feature to play back sources with the accurate surround processing programs compliant with the THX specifications. See page 72 for details.
THX 9
59 En
Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. When you set Surround to None (see page 84), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 54). Note
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when Surround is set to None (see page 84) and you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program in the following cases: when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 50). when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. when this unit is in the 11ch Stereo mode.
Before performing the following operation, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to F AMP.
Using CINEMA DSP HD mode

CINEMA DSP HD mode creates the intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room. You can activate and deactivate the CINEMA DSP HD mode. Press P 3D DSP repeatedly to turn on and off the CINEMA DSP HD mode. HD CUBIC:ON appears in the front panel display and the HD indicator (see page 40) and HD sound field indicators light up while this unit is in the CINEMA DSP HD mode. CINEMA DSP HD mode creates the intensive and stereoscopic sound field in the listening room. HD CUBIC:OFF appears in the front panel display and the HD indicator disappears when the CINEMA DSP HD mode is turned off. Conventional CINEMA DSP mode creates the large and expanding sound field in the listening room. Notes
HD CUBIC: appears when the CINEMA DSP HD mode is not available. If you set Front Presence to None, this unit cannot activate the CINEMA DSP HD mode. This unit activates the CINEMA DSP HD mode only when you select one of the CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (except the 11ch Stereo mode). When your headphones are connected to this unit, this unit cannot activate the CINEMA DSP HD mode.
Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 54). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Notes
SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 50). SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see page 61) or 2ch Stereo mode (see page 59) is selected, or when this unit is in the STRAIGHT mode.
Enjoying unprocessed input sources

When this unit is in the STRAIGHT mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers and multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. y
You can also select the STRAIGHT mode by using GUI menu. See page 78 for details.
Press H STRAIGHT (or R STRAIGHT) to select STRAIGHT.
STRAIGHT
y
The names of the audio signal format of the input source and the active decoder appear in the front panel display. You can select the extended surround mode used with the STRAIGHT mode by pressing N EXTD SUR. (see page 72).
Deactivating the STRAIGHT mode

Press H STRAIGHT (or R STRAIGHT) so that STRAIGHT disappears from the front panel display. The sound effect is turned back on. y
You can also select desired sound field program by rotating I PROGRAM (or press one of the desired sound field program buttons (Q )) repeatedly.
60 En
Basic Operation
Using audio features

Before performing the following operation, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to F AMP.
Notes
If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and center speakers and the subwoofer. TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT or the THX Surround mode is selected, or when MULTI CH is selected as the input source.
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound

Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. Press C PURE DIRECT (or M PURE DIRECT) to turn on or off the Pure Direct mode. The C PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up and the front panel display automatically turns off while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. Notes
When you set Audio input jack selects to Auto, HDMI, or Coax/Opt (see page 52) and play back the bitstreams or multi-channel PCM sources, this unit activates the corresponding decoder. The following operations are not possible when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode: switching the sound field program displaying the GUI menu operating video functions (video conversion, etc.) The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this unit is turned off. When you set Pure Direct in Manual Setup to Video On, you can display the video images of the current input source (see page 89). You cannot use the GUI menu while this unit is un the Pure Direct mode even if Pure Direct in Manual Setup to Video On. While this unit is in the Pure Direct mode, you cannot activate Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4, and when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 are automatically tuned off.
y
Use Tone Control parameter in Sound menu to adjust the balance of bass and treble output to your speakers or headphones by using GUI menu. See page 88 for details.
Basic Operation
Adjusting the speaker level

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note
This operation will override the level adjustments made in Auto Setup (see page 42) and Speaker Level (see page 86).
Press 8 LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust.
Display Adjusted speaker Front left speaker Front right speaker Center speaker Surround left speaker Surround right speaker Surround back left speaker Surround back right speaker Subwoofer left Subwoofer right Front presence left speaker Front presence right speaker Rear presence left speaker Rear presence right speaker
FRONT L FRONT R CENTER SUR. L SUR. R SB L SB R SWFR L SWFR R FP L FP R RP L RP R
y
The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation is performed.
Adjusting the tonal quality

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front L/R and center speaker channels and the subwoofer channel.
1 2
Press M TONE CONTROL on the front panel. Press I PROGRAM repeatedly to select the highfrequency response (TREBLE), or the low-frequency response (BASS). Rotate I PROGRAM to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE), or the low-frequency response (BASS). Control range: 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
y
Once you press 8 LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing 9 k / n.
Press 9 l / h to adjust the speaker output level. Press 9 h to increase the value. Press 9 l to decrease the value. Control range: 10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
61 En
Recording
Recording
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. Caution The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTSencoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Notes
When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. TONE CONTROL (see page 61) and the volume settings, the speaker level (see page 86) and the sound field programs (see page 54) do not affect recorded material. When this unit is in the Pure Direct mode, no signals output at the AUDIO OUT jacks. The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks on this unit cannot be recorded. The Internet Radio, PC or MCX audio signals are only output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks. Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. A given input source is not output on the same AUDIO OUT channel. S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR. The analog audio and video signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks and DVR or VCR OUT jacks for recording. Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
1 2
Turn on all the connected components. Press L REC OUT/ZONE2 until the RECOUT indicator lights up in the front panel display. This unit in the recording source selecting mode.
RECOUT
Rotate I PROGRAM to select the source component you want to record from. Carry out the operation while the RECOUT indicator is lit. y
Select SOURCE to record the currently selected input source.
4 5
Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. Start recording on the recording component.
62 En

Using iPod ........................................................................................ 64
Controlling iPod ............................................................................................................ 64
Using Network/USB features ............................................................. 66

Navigating the network and USB menus .......................................................................... Using a PC server or Yamaha MCX-2000 ........................................................................ Using the Internet Radio ................................................................................................... Using a USB storage device or a USB portable audio player .......................................... Using shortcut buttons ...................................................................................................... 66 68 69 69 70
Using iPod
Using iPod
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal on this unit (see page 36), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to enhance the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 59). Notes
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and video monitor, see the iPod section in Troubleshooting on page 126. Once your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal on this unit, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod. Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, iPod connected appears in the front panel display. Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal on this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the Standby Charge parameter in iPod (see page 93). While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 40) appears in the front panel display. Once the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears.
Controlling iPod
You can control your iPod when DOCK is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the GUI screen of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode).
Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode

You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control with the aid of the video monitor. The name of the song being played appears in the front panel display according to the Scroll parameter in Front Panel Disp. (see page 93). You can also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the by using your video monitor. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. Notes
Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the GUI screen of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores _. You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the GUI screen. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. You can set the time for which the GUI screen of iPod is displayed in the video monitor by using the On Screen parameter in Manual Setup (see page 90). Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to F SOURCE and then press 3 DOCK.
Remote control operation

Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to F SOURCE and then press 3 DOCK. Button
9 ENTER k n l h A ll hh a b s e p I K MENU DISPLAY Subsequent menu Menu up Menu down Previous menu Subsequent menu Search backward (Press and hold) Search forward (Press and hold) Skip forward Skip backward Stop Pause (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) Play (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) Previous menu Display
Function
Press K DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display appears in the video monitor.
Top Playlist Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Settings
Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode

You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the video monitor. y
You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod (some models only). Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
64 En
Using iPod
Press 9 k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod menu and then press 9 ENTER to begin playback of the selected song. Choices: Playlist (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings (settings) Playlist > Songs Artists > Albums > Songs Albums > Songs Songs Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs Composers > Albums > Songs Settings > Shuffle, Repeat
The functions of the play information display

iPod Information
1 2 3 4
0:51
1/9 Frankie Zipper Made-to-order Road to India
5 6 7 8
-7:44
1 Track number/total tracks 2 Name of the album 3 Name of the song 4 Elapsed time 5 (playback), (pausing), (search backward) (search forward) or
Shuffle (Shuffle) Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums Select Off to deactivate this feature. Select Songs to set this unit to play songs in random order. Select Albums to set this unit to play albums in random order. Notes
When Shuffle is set to a setting other than Off , appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. Press 9 ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of Shuffle.
6 Shuffle and repeat icons 7 Name of the artist 8 Progress bar 9 Remaining time Internal Source Operation
Repeat (Repeat) Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All Select Off to deactivate this feature. Select One to set this unit to repeat one song. Select All to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. Notes
When Repeat is set to a setting other than Off , or appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. Press 9 ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of Repeat.
y
Press K DISPLAY again to turn off the iPod menu.
iPod menu in the Zone OSD

You can control your iPod by using the Zone OSD. The design and functions may be different from the iPod menu displayed in the video monitor in the main zone.
65 En
Using Network/USB features

This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files saved on your PC, Yamaha MCX-2000, USB storage device and USB portable audio player or access the Internet Radio. Notes
Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations. For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical reference books, if needed. Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played.
y
For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and video monitor, see the Network and USB section in Troubleshooting on page 124.
Navigating the network and USB menus

The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu.
NET/USB PC/MusicCAST (MCX-2000) Internet Radio Server*
Bookmark
Selects an Internet Radio station that has been added to the Bookmark list (see page 69).
My Added Station
Selects an Internet Radio station that you add to the list of the stations.
Location
Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by location.
Genres
Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by genre.
New Stations
Selects an Internet Radio station from the ones that have recently started the service.
Popular Stations
Selects an Internet Radio station from the list of popular stations.
Podcasts
Selects a Podcast service by location or genre.
Help
Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service.
USB
Files/Directories
Selects a file by navigating directories.
Note
* Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed.
y
You can also browse and select the desired contents by using your PC. See page 101 for details.
66 En
The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate the network and USB menus. See pages 68 to 70 for details about each sub input source.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to F SOURCE.
5
y
Press 9 ENTER to play the selected song or to listen to the selected station.
Press 3 NET/USB on the remote control to select NET/USB as the input source. The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the contents previously played for the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played.
Lights up
See page 65 for details about the functions of the play information display. Some items do not appear in the play information display depending on the selected sub input source. You can set the time for which the GUI screen of the network/USB is displayed in the video monitor by using On Screen in Manual Setup (see page 90). Press K DISPLAY again to turn off the Network/USB menu.
Remote control operation

Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to F SOURCE and then press 3 NET/ USB. Button
8 9 TITLE k n l h ENTER 0 A MEMORY NET RADIO USB b a PC/MCX s p B I 18 MENU DISPLAY Bookmark *1 Up Down Previous menu
Function
Press K DISPLAY to display the top NET/USB menu. The following display appears in the video monitor. If any other screen appears in the video monitor, press I MENU on the remote control repeatedly until the top NET/ USB menu appears.
Top PC/MusicCAST Internet Radio USB
Subsequent menu Subsequent menu Memory Select NET RADIO Select USB Skip backward (PC/MCX and USB only) Skip forward (PC/MCX and USB only) Select PC/MCX Stop Play Numeric buttons (1-8) *2 Previous menu Display
Press 9 k / n to select the desired sub input source and then press 9 h or 9 ENTER. y
You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing A PC/ MCX, A NET RADIO, or A USB when NET/USB is selected as the input source. This unit automatically starts playback of the last selected music file, Internet Radio station, or Podcast when you press A PC/MCX, A NET RADIO, or A USB.
*1 Press and hold to store your favorite Internet Radio stations with bookmarks (see page 69). *2 Press to assign or recall the preset items (see page 70).
Network/USB menu in the Zone OSD

You can use the network/USB feature with the Zone OSD. The design and functions may be different from the network/USB menu displayed in the video monitor in the main zone.
Press 9 k / n / l / h to select the desired song or Internet Radio station. Press 9 k / n to select the desired menu. Press 9 h to enter the selected menu. Press 9 l to return to the previous menu level. y
> in the right corner of each menu line indicates that there is a submenu available in the next menu level. You can also press 9 ENTER or I MENU to enter the selected menu or to return to the previous menu level.
67 En
Using a PC server or Yamaha MCX-2000

Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or Yamaha MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that enhances the concept of Yamaha exclusive MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method over a personal network.
Installing Windows Media Player 11 on your PC

With Windows Media Player 11, you can play back the audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents of Windows Media Player 11. y
You can also play back the audio files on your PC with Windows Media Connect 2.0 installed.
1
Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC, or register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-2000. Refer to Installing Windows Media Player 11 on your PC and Registering this unit on the Yamaha MCX-2000 on page 68. This procedure is needed only the first time. (PC only) You may need to make some setting of Windows Media Player 11 to start the contents sharing. Refer to the attached documents of Windows Media Player 11. Turn on your PC or MCX-2000. The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST. Select a desired server or MusicCAST to begin playback.
Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC. You can download the installer of Windows Media Player 11 from the Microsoft website, or use the upgrade function of the installed Microsoft Windows Media Player. Turn on your PC and then share a folder on the PC. The Shared folder is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST.
Notes
If the operating system (OS) of your PC is Windows Vista, Windows Media Player 11 is pre-installed (except some products). Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software appropriately.
Registering this unit on the Yamaha MCX-2000

You must register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-2000 so that this unit can be recognized by your Yamaha MCX-2000. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your Yamaha MCX2000.
Notes
Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations. You can connect this unit to up to 15 PC servers and 1 MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same subnet as this unit. Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files on your PC may not be playable or may be noisy when played. (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files immediately unless you set the Receive PCM Stream setting of this unit to ON on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000.
1 2 3
Turn off this unit. Set your Yamaha MCX-2000 to the Auto Config mode. Turn on this unit. MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/ MCX. The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of your Yamaha MCX-2000 (shown as CL-XXXXX), and this completes the automatic configuration procedure.
y
While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom of the playback information screen. You can use A b / a to skip backward/forward and A h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the video monitor. You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the Play Style parameters in NET/USB (see page 83). You can set the front panel display mode by using the Scroll parameter in Front Panel Disp. (see page 93).
Notes
The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5 digits of the MAC address of this unit. For details about MAC address, see page 93. To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the Manual Config mode of your Yamaha MCX-2000 (refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then set INITIALIZE in the advanced setup menu of this unit to NETWORK (see page 119). The client control functions of MusicCAST over this unit other than View Play Info, Receive PCM Stream and Edit Client title are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will stop the playback on this unit.
68 En
Using the Internet Radio

Use this feature to listen to Internet Radio stations. This unit uses the vTuner Internet Radio station database service particularly customized for this unit, providing over 2000 radio station database. Further, you can store your favorite stations with bookmarks. Notes
This service may be discontinued without notice. Some Internet Radio stations may not be played even if they are selected in the NET RADIO menu. To listen to the Internet Radio, connect this unit to your network (see page 37). A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem, etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.
Using a USB storage device or a USB portable audio player

Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files saved on your USB storage device or USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. This unit is equipped with the front and rear USB ports. Set USB Select in Input Select to Front or Rear to select the active USB port (see page 83). Notes
This unit supports USB mass storage class or USB MTP devices using FAT 16 or FAT 32. Only the first partition is displayed in the GUI menu. You cannot select files in other partitions. Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per directory are recognized. Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the requirements. Some WAV, MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files may not be playable or may be noisy when played. When you connect your USB storage device or USB portable audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay.
y
You can use A h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the video monitor. Podcast is a type of the Internet Radio service, and there are a number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops playback when an episode of the Podcast ends. Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure the security settings appropriately.
y
While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom of the playback information screen. You can use A b / a to skip backward/forward and A h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the video monitor. You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the Play Style parameters in NET/USB (see page 83). You can set the front panel display mode by using the Scroll parameter in Front Panel Disp. (see page 93).
Storing your favorite Internet Radio stations with bookmarks

Use this feature to select your favorite Internet Radio stations quickly. Press and hold 8 TITLE on the remote control while the selected Internet Radio station service is being broadcast. The stored Internet Radio station is added to the Bookmark list (see page 66). y
To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the first level of the Bookmark list and then press and hold 8 TITLE on the remote control. You can also register your favorite Internet Radio stations to this unit by accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need the MAC address of this unit as the ID number and your e-mail address to create your personal account. Use Information in the Network menu to display the MAC address of this unit (see page 92). For details, refer to the help information on the website. URL: http://yradio.vtuner.com/
69 En
Using shortcut buttons

Use this feature to access the desired music sources (WAV, MP3 and WMA files on the connected PC, MCX-2000 or USB storage devices and Internet Radio stations) directly. You can preset 8 items in each sub input sources.
Select an item by using numeric buttons (1-8) (B )

Assigning the items to the numeric button (1-8)

1 2 3
Press 3 NET/USB to select NET/USB as the input source. Select the desired sub input source. Press one of the numeric button (1-8) (B ) which the desired item is assigned to select the item as the input source. The selected preset number appears in the front panel display, and this unit starts the playback of the source assigned to the selected numeric button.
1 2
Press 3 NET/USB to select NET/USB as the input source. Select a desired music source you want to assign to the numeric button (1-8) (B ), and then play back the source. See page 67 for details. Press 0 MEMORY. This unit in the memory preset mode. The MEMORY indicator flashes and following message appears in the video monitor and front panel display.
1: PC/MCX
Selected preset number
Notes
MEMORY
-: PC/MCX
Preset number
Flashes
y
When you do not complete each of the following steps within 10 seconds, the memory preset mode is automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 3.
Empty Memory! appears in the front panel display and the short message display when you press the numeric button (1-8) (B ) to which no items are assigned. This unit does not recall the correct item assigned to the selected numeric button (1-8) (B ) in the following cases: the connected USB device is incorrect. the PC or MCX-2000 which stores the selected item is turned off or disconnected from the network. the selected Internet Radio station is temporary unavailable or out of service. the directory of the selected item has been changed.
Press desired numeric buttons (1-8) (B ). The number of the selected numeric button appears in the video monitor or front panel display.
y
This unit stores the relative position of the preset items in a directory or playlist, and does not recall the correct item by using numeric buttons (1-8) (B ) if you add or delete music files to or from the same directory or playlist as the preset items. In such cases, preset the desired item to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B ) again. We recommend the following methods: PC server/MCX-2000 Create eight playlists which contain the desired items, and then preset the top item of each playlist to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B ). When you change the items which are preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B ), replace the registered items in the playlist with the desired items without deleting the playlist. USB storage devices Create eight directories which contain the desired items in a directory beside the directory which contains all music files, and then preset the top item of each directory to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B ). When you change the items which are preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B ), replace the items in the directory to the desired items without deleting the directory.
1: PC/MCX
Selected preset number
MEMORY
Flashes
Press 9 ENTER or 0 MEMORY to confirm the preset.
70 En
Advanced Operation
Advanced Operation
Advanced sound configurations ........................................................ 72
Selecting decoders ................................................................................................................... 72 Playing back sources with the THX Surround modes ............................................................. 73
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu .................................................. 74

GUI menu overview ................................................................................................................ 76 Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) ............................................................................... 77 Input Select .............................................................................................................................. 81 Manual Setup (Basic) .............................................................................................................. 83 Manual Setup (Volume) ........................................................................................................... 86 Manual Setup (Sound) ............................................................................................................. 86 Manual Setup (Video) ............................................................................................................. 89 Manual Setup (Multi Zone) ..................................................................................................... 91 Manual Setup (Network) ......................................................................................................... 92 Manual Setup (Option) ............................................................................................................ 93 Signal Info. (Input signal information) .................................................................................... 95 Language ................................................................................................................................. 95
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory) ........... 96

Saving the current system settings .......................................................................................... 96 Loading the stored system settings .......................................................................................... 98 Using examples ....................................................................................................................... 99
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser (Web Control Center) ..................................................................... 101 Remote control features .................................................................... 102
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components .................................................................. 102 Customizing the remote control ............................................................................................ 104 Setting the backlight mode of the remote control (LIGHT) .................................................. 104 Setting remote control codes (P-SET) ................................................................................... 104 Programming codes from other remote controls (LEARN) .................................................. 105 Changing source names in the display window (RNAME) .................................................. 106 Macro programming features ................................................................................................ 107 Clearing configurations ......................................................................................................... 109 Simplified remote control ...................................................................................................... 110
Using multi-zone configuration ........................................................ 111

Step1: Planning the multi-zone system ................................................................................. 111 Step2: Connecting the speakers, external amplifiers, and/or other components ................... 112 Step3: Setting the zone parameter ......................................................................................... 116 Controlling Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 .................................................................................. 116 Using the party mode ............................................................................................................ 118
Advanced setup ................................................................................. 119

Using the advanced setup menu ............................................................................................ 119
Advanced sound configurations

Selecting decoders
Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode)
Use this feature to play back sources with selected decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-channels. Set the operation mode selector to F AMP and then press Q SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the remote control to select the surround decode mode. You can select desired surround decoder modes depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. y
You can select the desired decoder and adjust the decoder parameter settings by using GUI menu. See page 78 for details.
y
When you select the surround decode mode for the multi-channel digital sources, this unit automatically selects the corresponding decoder for each source.
Selecting decoders used with sound field programs

Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with MOVIE sound field programs (except Mono Movie) or THX Surround mode. Use Decoder Type parameter in Stereo/Surround to set the desired decoder (see page 78). Available decoders (Decoder Type) For MOVIE sound field programs (see page 58) Choices: PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema For THX Cinema mode Choices: Pro Logic, PLIIx Movie (PL II Movie), Neo:6 Cinema, Off For THX Music mode Choices: Pro Logic, PLIIx Music (PL II Music), Neo:6 Music, Off For THX Games mode Choices: Pro Logic, PL II Game, Neo:6 Cinema, Off
Decoder descriptions
Name of the decoder (Decoder Type) PLIIx Music PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when Surround Back is set to None or using headphones (see page 84).
Notes
When you select Decoder Type to Off in the THX Surround mode, this unit activates the decoder corresponding to the input source.
Decoder description
Selecting decoders for multi-channel sources

Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders.
PLIIx Movie PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when Surround Back is set to None or using headphones (see page 84).
Set the operation mode selector to F AMP and then press N EXTD SUR. on the remote control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
Choice Functions
Activates the optimum decoder to play back signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit recognizes a signal flag being input. Use this feature to activate the desired decoders for the playback of multi-channel sources manually.
PLIIx Music PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when Surround Back is set to None or using headphones (see page 84).
AUTO
PLIIx Game PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when Surround Back is set to None or using headphones (see page 84).
Decoders (PLIIx Movie, PLIIx Music, EX/ES, EX) OFF
Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1 channels.
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources.
Press 9 l / h repeatedly to select a decoder while the name of the decoder is displayed when you select other than AUTO or OFF.
y
Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input sources correctly.
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources.
72 En
Notes
The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the speakers and the input sources. 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases: when Surround (see page 84) or Surround Back (see page 84) is set to None. when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played. when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. when this unit is in the stereo playback, 11ch Enhancer (see page 59) or Pure Direct (see page 61) mode. when BI-AMP is set to ON (see page 120).
For multi-channel sources

You can select the following THX Surround programs. Ultra2 Cinema Surround EX Cinema
THX Surround modes for the multi-channel movie sources. When this unit activates the Dolby Digital EX decoder (see left), this unit automatically selects the THX Surround EX mode, and when this unit activates the decoders for 6.1/7.1-channel playback or when Surround Back is set to Large x1, Small x1, or None (see page 84), this unit automatically selects the THX Cinema mode.
Playing back sources with the THX Surround modes

Use this feature to play back sources with the accurate surround processing programs compliant with the THX specifications. Rotate I PROGRAM (or set the operation mode selector to F AMP and then press Q THX repeatedly) to select the desired THX Surround mode. You can select the THX Surround mode for movies, music, or games.
Ultra2 Music Music

THX Surround mode for the multi-channel music sources. When Surround Back is set to Large x1, Small x1, or None (see page 84), this unit automatically selects the THX Music mode.
Ultra2 Games Games

THX Surround mode for the multi-channel game audio. When Surround Back is set to Large x1, Small x1, or None (see page 84), this unit automatically selects the THX Games mode.
For 2-channel sources

You can select the following THX Surround programs. Cinema
THX Surround mode for the 2-channel movie sources. This unit decodes the sources by the selected decoder.
y
To optimize the speaker settings for the THX Surround modes, set the parameters in THX Set (see page 83) appropriately.
System Memory You can store the settings of this unit optimized for the THX Surround modes and recall then easily by using the system memory feature. See page 96 for details. Advanced Operation
Music
THX Surround mode for the 2-channel music sources. This unit decodes the sources by the selected decoder before THX processing.
Games
THX Surround mode for the 2-channel game audio. This unit decodes the sources by the selected decoder before THX processing.
y
When this unit is in the THX Cinema, THX Music, or THX Games mode, you can select the desired surround decoder (see page 72).
73 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

DSP-Z11 GUI menu tree
Stereo/Surround P. 77 Input Select P. 81
TUNER MULTI CH PHONO CD CD-R MD/TAPE BD/HD DVD DVD DTV CBL/SAT DVR VCR V-AUX DOCK NET/USB
Manual Setup
Volume P. 86
Adaptive DRC Adaptive DSP Lvl Max Volume Initial Volume Muting Type LFE Level Dynamic Range S-Wave Control Parametric EQ Tone Control Speakers Headphones Speakers Headphones
Sound P. 86
Lipsync
Control Bass Treble Auto Bypass HDMI Auto Auto Manual
Pure Direct Channel Mute Video P. 89 Conversion HDMI Processing Component I/P HDMI Resolution HDMI Aspect Short Message On Screen Position Wall Paper Test Tone THX Set
Basic P. 83
Speaker Set
THX Ultra2 SWFR Bndry Gain Comp SB Speaker Dist. THX Loudness Plus Front Center Surround Surround Back Front Presence Rear Presence Subwoofer
Configuration Phase Bass Out
Speaker Distance Speaker Level
74 En
Multi Zone P. 91
Speaker B Zone SP Assign Party Mode Set Zone2 Set
Zone2 Volume Zone2 Max Vol. Zone2 Initial Vol. Zone2 Balance Zone2 Mono Muting Type
Zone3 Set
Zone4 Set
Zone OSD Network P. 92 Option P. 93 Configuration Information Front Panel Disp. iPod Audio Select Decoder Mode EXTD Surround Memory Guard HDMI Set Trigger Output
Advanced Operation
Trigger1 Trigger2
Auto Setup
P. 42 Main Main Load Main Save Main Rename Zone2 Load Zone2 Save Zone2 Rename Zone3 Load Zone3 Save Zone3 Rename Zone4 Load Zone4 Save Zone4 Rename
System Memory P. 96
Zone2
Zone3
Zone4
Signal Info. P. 95 Language P. 95
Audio Info. Video Info. English Franais Deutsch Espaol
75 En
GUI menu overview

This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit.
Stereo/Surround Input Select Manual Setup Auto Setup System Memory Volume Sound Video
Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu)

Use this feature to select the sound field programs and customize the program parameter settings (see page 77).
Input Select (Input select menu)

Use this feature to select the input source and customize the parameters of each input source (see page 81).
Manual Setup (Manual setup menu)

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Volume (Volume menu) See page 86 for details. Sound (Sound menu) See page 86 for details. Video (Video menu) See page 89 for details. Basic (Basic menu) See page 83 for details. Multi Zone (Multi-zone menu) See page 91 for details. Network (Network and USB menu) See page 92 for details. Option (Option menu) See page 93 for details.
Auto Setup (Automatic setup menu)

Use this feature to run the automatic setup and specify which speaker parameters to be adjusted (see page 42).
System Memory (System memory menu)

Use this feature to store and recall various settings of this unit (see page 96).
Signal Info. (Signal information)

Use this feature to check audio and video signal information (see page 95).
Language (GUI language menu)

Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the GUI menu of this unit (see page 95). y
You can also select the GUI language using LANGUAGE parameter in Advanced setup in the front panel display (see page 120). See page 53 for details about the basic operations in GUI menu. Refer to the Graphical user interface (GUI) menu on page 74 for the complete menu structure.
76 En
Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu)

Use this feature to select the sound field programs (see page 54), the surround decode mode, the THX Surround mode, or the STRAIGHT mode (see page 60), and adjust the parameters of each program.
Adjusting the vertical dialogue position (Dialogue Lift) Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is at the center of the video monitor screen.
Basic configuration of sound field programs

Each sound field program has some parameters defining the characteristics of the program. To customize the selected sound field program, adjust DSP Level and/or Dialogue Lift first, and then try other parameters. Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound field programs (DSP Level) Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field in the listening room. Use the DSP Level parameter to adjust the level of the effect sounds.
The ideal dialogue position
If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video monitor screen, increase the value of Dialogue Lift.
Move up to the ideal dialogue position
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 0 (initial setting) is the lowest position, and 5 is the highest position. Notes
The DSP effect sound level is low The DSP effect sound level is high
Dialogue Lift is available when Front Presence is set to Yes (see page 84) and headphones are not connected. You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue position.
Adjust DSP Level as follows: Increase the value of DSP Level when the effect sound of the selected sound field program is too weak. you cannot recognize any difference between the sound field programs. Decrease the value of DSP Level when the sound is vague. you feel that the additional sound effect is excessive. Control range: 6 dB to +3 dB
Advanced Operation
77 En
Sound field parameter descriptions

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
Sound field parameter Features
Decoder type. Selects the decoder used with the SUR. DECODE, THX, or MOVIE programs. See page 72 for details. Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the apparent size of the sound field by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound field seems to the listener.
Decoder Type Init. Delay Sur. Init.Delay SB. Init. Delay
y
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (Init. Delay) 1 to 49 ms (Sur. Init. Delay and SB Init. Delay) Source sound Early reflections Level Level Level
Time Delay Sound source Delay
Time Delay
Time
Reflection face
Small value = 1 ms
Large value = 99 ms
Room Size Sur. Room Size SB. Room Size
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. y
When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Source sound Early reflections Time
Level
Level
Time Sound source
Level
Time
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
78 En
Sound field parameter
Features
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as dead, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as live. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the liveness of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Live Level Level Level Time Dead Time
Liveness Sur. Liveness SB. Liveness
Time
Small reflected sound
Large reflected sound
Small value = 0
Large value = 10
Rev. Time
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time to get more sustaining reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get articulate sound. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Reverberation Source sound Early reflections 60 dB 60 dB 60 dB Reverberation
Advanced Operation
Rev. Time Sound source Short reverberation
Rev. Time
Rev. Time Long reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s
Large value = 5.0 s
Rev. Delay
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control range: 0 to 250 ms
(dB)
Level
Source sound
60 dB Reverberation Time Rev. Delay Rev. Time
79 En
Sound field parameter
Features
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control range: 0 to 100% Source sound
Rev. Level
Level
Rev. Level
Time
Stereo program parameter descriptions

Sound field parameter Features
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: Auto, Off y
Select Auto to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when BASS and TREBLE are set to BYPASS (see page 61). Select Off not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when BASS and TREBLE are set to BYPASS. When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: Bass Out is set to Front & SWFR (see page 85). Front is set to Small (see page 84) and Bass Out is set to SWFR (see page 85).
Direct
(2ch Stereo only)
Center Level Surround L Level Surround R Level Sur.Back L Level Sur.Back R Level F.PRNS L Level F.PRNS R Level R.PRNS L Level R.PRNS R Level
(11ch Stereo only)
11-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 11-channel stereo mode. The available parameters differ depending on the speaker settings. Control range: 0 to 100%
Compressed Music Enhancer mode parameter descriptions

The Compressed Music Enhancer mode Features
Straight enhancer or 11-channel enhancer effect level. Select High or Low to adjust the effect for the high-frequency. Choices: High, Low
Level
(Straight Enhancer and 11ch Enhancer only)
Decoder parameter descriptions

Decoder parameter Features
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Choices: Off, On Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) Initial setting: 3
Panorama
(PLIIx Music and PLII Music only)
Center Width
80 En
Decoder parameter
Features
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: 3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard)
Dimension
Center Image
(Neo:6 Music only)
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to 1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker) Initial setting: 0.3
Initialize (Program parameters initialization)

Use this feature to initialize the parameter of the selected sound field program. Choices: No, Yes
Rev. Level Dialogue Lift Initialize No Yes
Select Yes and then press 9 ENTER to set the program parameters to the factory default settings. Select No (or press 9 l) to cancel the program parameter initialization. y
Use DSP PARAM of INITIALIZE in Advanced setup to initialize the parameters of all sound field programs (see page 120).
Input Select
Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the signal input at each input source.
Input source TUNER MULTI CH
Notes
Some parameters described above may not be available for all input sources and some parameters are only available for specific input sources. You can set Volume Trim for each sub input source separately. The Play Style setting is effective to both PC/MCX andUSB.
Advanced Operation
Sub input source
Parameter
Volume Trim Rename Volume Trim Rename Multi CH Assign BGV I/O Assignment Audio Select Decoder Mode Volume Trim Rename
I/O Assignment (Input/output assignment)

Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the D INPUT selector (or the input selector buttons (3 )).
PHONO CD CD-R MD/TAPE BD/HD DVD DVD DTV CBL/SAT DVR VCR V-AUX
I/O Assignment Audio Select
Coaxial Input Optical Input Optical Output
I/O Assignment Audio Select Decoder Mode Volume Trim Rename Volume Trim Rename Volume Trim Play Style Volume Trim USB Select Volume Trim Play Style
Decoder Mode
DOCK NET/USB
Example 1: Assigning the CD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack to VCR.
PC/MCX NET RADIO USB
1 2 3
Select Input Select in the GUI menu and then select VCR. Select I/O Assignment and then Coaxial Input. Select 5 CD.
81 En
Example 2: Clearing a jack assignment.
Note
You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using this setting.
1 2
Select Input Select and then select the desired input source (DVD, etc.). Select I/O Assignment and then select the desired jack assignment (Coaxial Input, Optical Input, Optical Output, Analog I/O, Component Video, or HDMI). Select None and then press 9 ENTER to clear the assignment.
Rename (Rename)
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the GUI menu or the front panel display menu. (DVD is used as the source component in the following example.)
Press 9 l / h to place the _ (underscore) under the space or character you want to edit.
Decoder Mode Volume Trim CAPITAL DVD OK RESET
Notes
None appears in the GUI when any input source is not assigned to the input/output jack. You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to signals input at the COAXIAL jack.
Rename
Audio Select (Audio input jack select)

Use this feature to select the type of the input jack you want to use.
Choice Auto Functions
Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital signals (3) Analog signals Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not input, no sound is output. Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack. When no signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output.
Press 9 ENTER repeatedly to select a character type (CAPITAL/SMALL/LATIN CAPITAL/LATIN SMALL/ FIGURE/MARK). Press 9 k / n to select the character you want to use and 9 l / h to move to the next one. You can use up to 9 characters for each memory. Press 9 n to change the character in the following order, or press 9 k to go in the reverse order: CAPITAL A to Z, space SMALL a to z, space LATIN CAPITAL , , , etc., space LATIN SMALL , , , etc., space FIGURE 0 to 9, space MARK !, #, %, &, etc., space Press 9 ENTER to switch between character types. Press 9 h repeatedly to select RESET to set the name of the input source to the initial name. Notes
The character types you can select differ depending on the setting in Language (see page 95). If you set Language to , you can also select Japanese characters.
HDMI Coax/Opt
Analog
y
You can also select the audio input jack by pressing F AUDIO SELECT (or O AUDIO SEL). See page 52 for details. You can set the default audio input jack select of this unit by using Audio Select in Option (see page 93).
Note
This feature is not available when no digital input jack (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition, HDMI is not available as an Audio input jack select setting when the HDMI input jacks are not used. Use I/O Assignment in Input Select to reassign the respective input jack.
4
y
Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)

Use this feature to switch the decoder mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks (see page 81) for digital audio signals.
Choice Auto DTS Functions
Automatically detects digital audio signal input types and selects the appropriate decoder. Activates the DTS decoder when digital audio signals are input.
Press 9 l / h repeatedly to select OK and press 9 ENTER when complete.
Repeat steps 1 to 4 to rename each input. You can also change the name of the input source that appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control. Refer to Changing source names in the display window (RNAME) on page 106.
Note
You can only change the name of the current input source (except for multi channel input sources) using this setting.
Volume Trim (Volume trimming)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each input source. This feature is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Control range: 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB y
This parameter also affects the signals output at the ZONE OUT jacks.
82 En
Multi CH Assign (Multi channel assignment)

Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Input Channels (Input channels) Use this setting to select the number of channels input from an external decoder (see page 35).
Choice 6ch 8ch Description
Select 6ch the connected component outputs discrete 6-channel audio signals. Select 8ch the connected component outputs discrete 8-channel audio signals. Also set Front Input (see below) to the analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel signals output from the connected component are input.
Notes
If Repeat is set to Single, the setting will be reset to Off when this unit is turned off. When you set BGV to Last, you can select the background video source by using the remote control only.
Shuffle (Shuffle) Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order.
Choice Off On Functions
Deactivates the shuffle function. Play songs or albums in a random order. appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen.
USB Select (USB port select)

Selects the component connected to the front or rear USB port as the input source (see page 37).
Choice Front Rear Functions
Selects the component connected to the front USB port as the input source. Selects the component connected to the rear USB port as the input source.
Note
Depending on the settings of the zone configuration, no sound is output at the surround back speakers even if you set Input Channels to 8ch. In this case, select 6ch and set the audio output setting of the source component to 6 channels.
Front Input (Front left and right channels input jacks) If you selected 8ch in Input Channels, you can select analog jacks at which front left and right channel signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, BD/HD DVD, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, DVR, VCR, V-AUX Note
If you have renamed an input source in Rename (see page 82), the name of the input source appears in the choices of this parameter.
Manual Setup (Basic)

Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker setting. y
Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set automatically when you run Auto Setup. You can use the basic menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running Auto Setup first. You can reset these parameters by performing the Auto Setup procedure (see page 42). If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
Advanced Operation
BGV (Back ground video)

Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Choice Functions
Test Tone (Test tone)

Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance, and Speaker Level settings.
This unit does not output the test tone for the Speaker Set, Speaker Level, and Speaker Distance settings. This unit outputs the test tone for the Speaker Set, Speaker Level, and Speaker Distance settings. While Test Tone is set to On, the volume level is automatically set to 0 dB.
Selects the corresponding input source as the background BD/HD DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, video source. DVD, DVR, VCR, V-AUX
Last Off
Automatically selects the last selected video source as the background video source. Does not play the video source in the background.
Note
If you have renamed an input source in Rename (see page 82), the name of the input source appears in the choices of this parameter.
Notes
Loud test tones will be output when On is selected. In this case, make sure no children are present in the listening room. This function is automatically turned off if you exit Basic.
Play Style (Playback styles)

Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to your preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order or repeat one specific song or a sequence of songs. Repeat (Repeat) Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs.
Choice Off Single All Functions
Deactivates the repeat function. Repeats one song. appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen. Repeats a sequence of songs. appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen.
THX Set (THX settings)

Use this feature to set the parameters to optimize the THX Surround modes (see page 73). THX Ultra2 SWFR (THX Ultra2 subwoofer setting) Use this feature to select whether the connected subwoofers are the THX Ultra2 certified subwoofers.
Choice Yes No Descriptions
Select this setting when the connected subwoofers are the THX Ultra2 certified subwoofers. Select this setting when the connected subwoofers are not the THX Ultra2 certified subwoofers.
83 En
Note
When THX Ultra2 SWFR is set to No, you cannot select Bndry Gain Comp is automatically set to Off.
Note
When Bass Out is set to Front (see page 85), you can select only Large in Front. If the value of Front is set to other than Large in advance, this unit change the value to Large automatically.
Bndry Gain Comp (Boundary gain compensation) Use this feature to improve boomy bass when the listening position is closer to the rear wall.
Choice Off On Descriptions
Select this setting when you do not want to use the boundary gain compensation feature. Select this setting to activate the boundary gain compensation feature.
Center (Center speaker)

Choice Large Small None Descriptions
Select this setting when the center speaker is large. Select this setting when the center speaker is small. Select this setting when you do not use the center speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers.
SB Speaker Dist. (Surround back speaker distance) Use this feature to set the distance between the left surround back speaker and right surround back speaker.
Choice Under 1ft (Under 0.3m) 1 4ft (0.3-1.2m) Descriptions
Select this setting when the distance between the two surround back speakers is less than 0.3 m (1 foot). Select this setting when the distance between the two surround back speakers is 0.3 m to 1.2 m (1 foot to 4 feet). Select this setting when the distance between the two surround back speakers is over 1.2 m (4 feet).
Surround (Surround left/right speakers)

Choice Large Small None Descriptions
Select this setting when the surround speakers are large. Select this setting when the surround speakers are small. Select this setting when you do not use the surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 60), and Surround Back is automatically set to None.
Over 4ft (over 1.2m)
y
See page 23 for the connection information of the surround speakers.
Note
The unit used in this parameter differs depending on the setting of Unit in Speaker Distance (see page 85).
Surround Back (Surround back left/right speakers)

Choice Large x1 Large x2 Small x1 Small x2 None Descriptions
Select this setting when the single surround back speaker is large. Select this setting when the surround back left and right speakers are large. Select this setting when the single surround back speaker is small. Select this setting when the surround back left and right speakers are small. Select this setting when you do not use the surround back speakers. The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers.
THX Loudness Plus (Loudness plus setting) THX Loudness Plus function compensates for the total and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel levels and frequency response. Use this feature to select whether this unit automatically activates the THX Loudness Plus function in the THX Surround modes.
Deactivates the Loudness Plus function. Activates the Loudness Plus function in the THX Surround modes.
Speaker Set (Speaker settings)

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference.
y
See page 23 for the connection information of the surround speakers.
Measure for the speaker size The woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small y
THX Ltd. recommends you that you set Front, Center, Surround, and Surround Back to Small and Cross Over to 80Hz (THX). To select the crossover frequency of the speaker(s) manually, select Small and then set Cross Over (see page 84).
Cross Over (Cross over) Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of the speaker(s) that is set to Small. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofers or to the speakers set to Large in Speaker Set (see pages 84). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz y
If your subwoofers can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
Front (Front speakers)

Choice Large Small Descriptions
Select this setting when the front speakers are large. Select this setting when the front speakers are small.
Front Presence (Front presence speakers) Use this feature if you want to use the front presence speakers connected to this unit.
Choice Yes
None
Descriptions
Select this setting when you use the front presence speakers. Select this setting when you do not use the front presence speakers. Rear Presence is automatically set to None.
84 En
Low-frequency signals output Notes

If you set Front Presence to None, you cannot activate the CINEMA DSP HD mode (see page 60). Dialogue Lift is available when Front Presence is set to Yes and headphones are not connected.
Subwoofers and speakers Choice Front & SWFR SWFR Front Subwoofers
*1 *4 No output *2 *3 *1
Front speakers
*3 *3 *3
Other speakers
Rear Presence (Rear presence speakers) Use this feature if you want to use the rear presence speakers connected to this unit.
Choice Yes
None
Descriptions
Select this setting when you use the rear presence speakers. Select this setting when you do not use the rear presence speakers.
Subwoofer (Subwoofer) Configuration (Subwoofer configuration) Use this feature to select the configuration of the subwoofers (see page 25).
Choice Front & Rear Stereo Monaural None Descriptions
Select this setting when you place the subwoofers to the front and rear of the listening room. Select this setting when you place the subwoofers to the left and right of the listening room. Select this setting when you use a single subwoofer. Select this setting when you do not use a subwoofer.
*1 Output(s) the low-frequency signals of the front channels and other speakers set to Small. *2 Always output the low-frequency signals of the front channels. *3 Output the low-frequency signals if the speakers are set to Large. *4 Outputs the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to Small or None.
Speaker Distance (Speaker distance)

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) Control step: 0.05 m (0.2 ft)
Speaker Distance Front L Front R Center Surround L Surround R Surround Back L Surround Back R Front Presence L Front Presence R Rear Presence L Rear Presence R Subwoofer L Subwoofer R Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker Front right speaker
y
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
Phase (Subwoofer phase) Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofers if bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choice Normal L Reverse R Reverse L&R Reverse Functions
Does not change the phase of your subwoofers. Sets the phase of the left (or front) subwoofer to reverse. Sets the phase of the right (or rear) subwoofer to reverse. Sets the phase of the both subwoofers to reverse.
Advanced Operation
Center speaker Surround left speaker Surround right speaker Surround back left speaker Surround back right speaker Front presence left speaker Front presence right speaker Rear presence left speaker Rear presence right speaker Subwoofer left Subwoofer right
Bass Out (Bass out) Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (lowfrequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. THX Ltd. recommends that Bass Out to SWFR. LFE signals output
Subwoofers and speakers Choice Front & SWFR SWFR Front Subwoofers
Output Output No output
y
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
Notes
The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SUR.BACK SINGLE jack, and adjust the distance in Surround Back L.
Front speakers
No output No output Output
Other speakers
No output No output No output
Unit (Unit) Selects the unit for displaying the values of Speaker Distance parameter.
Choice Meter (m) Feet (ft) Functions
Adjusts speaker distances in meters. Adjusts speaker distances in feet.
85 En
Speaker Level (Speaker level)

Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in Speaker Set (see page 84). Control range: 10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB
Speaker Level Front L Front R Center Surround L Surround R Surround Back L Surround Back R Front Presence L Front Presence R Rear Presence L Rear Presence R Subwoofer L Subwoofer R Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker Front right speaker Center speaker Surround left speaker Surround right speaker Surround back left speaker Surround back right speaker Front presence left speaker Front presence right speaker Rear presence left speaker Rear presence right speaker Subwoofer left Subwoofer right
Notes
The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function when this unit is in the THX Surround modes (see page 73) or Pure Direct mode (see page 61). If you set Direct in 2ch Stereo to Auto (see page 80) and this unit is in the 2ch Stereo mode, the adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function in some cases.
Adaptive DSP Lvl (Adaptive DSP effect level) Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP effect level (see page 77) automatically in conjunction with the volume level.
Choice Auto Off Functions
Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction with the volume level. Does not adjust the DSP effect level automatically.
Note
Even if you set Adaptive DSP Lvl to Auto, this unit does not change but fine-tunes the specified value of DSP Level (see page 77).
y
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.
Max Volume (Maximum volume) Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is 80.0 dB to +16.5 dB. However, when Max Volume is set to 5.0 dB, the volume range becomes 80.0 dB to 5.0 dB. Control range: 30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB Control step: 5.0 dB Initial Volume (Initial volume) Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, Mute, 80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Notes
When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current Max Volume setting. The Max Volume setting takes priority over the initial volume setting. For example, if Initial Volume is set to 20.0 dB and Max Volume is set to 30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to 30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time.
Notes
The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SUR.BACK SINGLE jack, and adjust the balance in Surround Back L. The setting of Speaker Level changes depending on the setting of PEQ Select in Manual Setup (see page 87).
Manual Setup (Volume)

Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume settings. Adaptive DRC (Adaptive dynamic range control) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When Adaptive DRC is set to Auto, this unit controls the dynamic range as follows: If the VOLUME setting is low: the dynamic range is narrow If the VOLUME setting is high: the dynamic range is wide
Muting Type (Muting type) Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 52).
Choice Full 20dB 40dB Functions
Mutes all the audio output. Reduces the current volume by 20 dB. Reduces the current volume by 40 dB.
Output level
Output level
Manual Setup (Sound)

AUTO OFF
AUTO OFF
Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.
Input level
Input level
LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes bitstream signals. Control range: 20.0 to 0.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB
VOLUME: low
VOLUME: high
Choice Auto Off
Functions
Adjusts the dynamic range automatically. Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
y
You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal sources by using Dynamic Range in Sound (see page 87). This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.
86 En
Speakers (Speaker low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphones (Headphone low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. Note
Depending on the settings of Bass Out (see page 85), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks.
PEQ Select (Parametric equalizer type select) Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer type that applied to the results of the automatic setup. See page 46 for the descriptions of each parametric equalizer type.
Choice
Manual
Descriptions
Applies the manually configured parametric equalizer in Manual Setup. Applies the Flat type parametric equalizer. Applies the Front type parametric equalizer. Applies the Natural type parametric equalizer. Does not use the parametric equalizer.
Flat Front Natural Through
Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)

Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding bitstream signals. Speakers (Speaker dynamic range) Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers. Headphones (Headphone dynamic range) Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the headphones.
Choice MAX STD Functions
Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range. Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. When this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range control is always active regardless of the instruction of the input source signals. MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow when this unit is decoding bitstream signals (except Dolby TrueHD). AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range according to the instruction of the input source signals when this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals.
Notes
When you carry out the automatic setup, this unit automatically set PEQ Select to Natural. Speaker Level settings (see page 86) also changes corresponding to the setting of PEQ Select. This unit does not change the configurations of Manual even if you perform the automatic setup.
MIN/AUTO
Manual parametric equalizer configuration of each speaker Use this feature to adjust the tonal quality of each speaker. You can copy the results of the automatic setup for the base of the manual configuration by using PEQ Data Copy. Set PEQ Select to Manual in advanced.
Press 9 k / n / l / h to select Test Tone or the speaker you want to adjust.

Choice Front L Front R Center Surround L Surround R Surround Back L Surround Back R Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker Front right speaker Center speaker Surround left speaker Surround right speaker Surround back left speaker Surround back right speaker Front presence left speaker Front presence right speaker Rear presence left speaker Rear presence right speaker Subwoofer left Subwoofer right
S-Wave Control (Standing wave control)

Use this menu to activate or deactivate the specially customized parametric equalizer to reduce the effects of acoustic standing waves in the listening room. See page 44 for details.
Choice On Off Functions
Activates the parametric equalizer. Deactivates the parametric equalizer.
Advanced Operation
Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer of each speaker. PEQ Data Copy (Parametric equalizer data copy) Use this feature to copy the result data of the automatic setup to the manual configuration area. You can select the parametric equalizer type applied to the copied result data of the automatic setup. See page 46 for the descriptions of each parametric equalizer type.
Choice Flat Manual Front Manual Natural Manual Descriptions
Copies the result of the automatic setup that the Flat type parametric equalizer is applied to. Manual Copies the result of the automatic setup that the Front type parametric equalizer is applied to. Copies the result of the automatic setup that the Natural type parametric equalizer is applied to.
Front Presence L Front Presence R Rear Presence L Rear Presence R Subwoofer L Subwoofer R
Test Tone Use this feature to select whether to turn on or off the test tone output while you are adjusting the tonal quality of each speaker.
Outputs the test tone. Does not output the test tone.
87 En
Control (Tone control)
Press 9 h to access the settings window.
Choice Speaker
Functions
Adjust the bass/treble balance of your speakers. Adjust the bass/treble balance of your headphones.
PEQ Data Copy PEQ Select Front L Front R Center
PARAM RESET EDIT EXIT Band/Gain
Headphone
y
Speaker and Headphone adjustments are stored independently. The adjustments for Speaker affects the front left/right, center, presence left/right speaker channels and Subwoofer channel.
Press 9 k / n / l / h to select PARAM and then press 9 ENTER to select a parameter from Band (band), Freq. (frequency) or Q (Q factor). y
You can adjust Gain (gain) with any parameter.
Bass (Bass control) Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: 125 Hz, 350 Hz, 500 Hz Control range: 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Press 9 n to select EDIT and press 9 ENTER to access the edit window. For more information on the parametric equalizer and each parameter, see page 131.
PEQ Data Copy PEQ Select Front L Front R Center Band Gain Freq. Q #1 0.0dB 62.5Hz 1.000
Control Bass Treble Auto Bypass

+6 0 -6
Speaker Freq.: 350Hz Gain: 0.0dB
Treble (Treble control) Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: 2.5 kHz, 3.5 kHz, 8.0 kHz Control range: 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB
The parameter selected in PARAM is highlighted. Press 9 l / h to adjust the parameter. Press 9 k / n to adjust the Gain. Press 9 ENTER to exit the edit window. y
When you select Band in step 3, you can use this menu as a graphic equalizer. Band #4, Band #5, Band #6, and Band #7 can adjust the frequencies above of 500 Hz. When you select Subwoofer L or Subwoofer R in step 1 and Band in step 3, you can adjust Band #1, Band #2, and Band #3 only. In this case, Band #1, Band #2, and Band #3 can adjust the frequencies below of 250 Hz.
Control Bass Treble Auto Bypass

+6 0 -6
Speaker Freq.: 3.5kHz Gain: 0.0dB
Auto Bypass (Auto bypass) Use this feature to select whether the audio output bypasses the tone control circuitry when Treble and Bass are set to 0 dB (see page 61).
Choice Auto Functions
Automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible when Treble and Bass are set to 0 dB. Does not bypass the tone control circuitry.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied with the results. y
If you want to reset all Parametric EQ parameter settings for the selected speaker, select RESET and press 9 ENTER.
Off
Select EXIT and press 9 ENTER to exit from the settings window.
Lipsync (Audio and video synchronization)

Use this feature to adjust the audio and video synchronization. HDMI Auto (HDMI automatic lip sync mode) If the connected video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack on this unit and compatible with the automatic audio and video synchronization function (automatic lip sync), this unit adjusts the audio and video synchronization automatically. Use this feature to activate or deactivate the automatic lip sync.
Tone Control (Tone control)

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble output to your speakers or headphones. Note
Tone Control is not effective when: the Pure Direct mode (see page 61) is selected. one of the THX Surround mode is selected (see page 73). MULTI CH is selected as the input source.
88 En
Choice Off
Descriptions
Select this setting if the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic lip sync. Use Auto to make fine adjustments of the audio and video synchronization. Select this setting if the video monitor is not compatible with the automatic lip sync or you do not want to use the automatic lip sync. Use Manual to adjustment the audio and video synchronization.
Channel Mute Front L Front R Center Surround L Surround R Surround Back L Surround Back R Front Presence L Front Presence R Rear Presence L Rear Presence R Subwoofer L Subwoofer R
Front left Front right Center Surround left Surround right
Speaker channel
On
Surround back left Surround back right Front presence left speaker Front presence right speaker Rear presence left speaker Rear presence right speaker Subwoofer left Subwoofer right
Auto (Automatic audio delay adjustment) Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and video synchronization when you set HDMI Auto to On. Control range: 0 to 240 ms Control step: 1 ms y
offset indicates the difference between the value of the audio delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio delay that you set in HDMI Auto. This unit stores the value of Offset and applies the value to other automatic lip sync compatible video monitors.
Manual (Manual audio delay adjustment) Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output manually to synchronize audio with video images when you set HDMI Auto to Off. Control range: 0 to 240 ms Control step: 1 ms
Manual Setup (Video)

Use this menu to adjust the video parameters. Note
Use the VIDEO in INITIALIZE to set the parameters in Manual Setup (Video) (except Short Message and On Screen) to the factory presets (see page 120).
Pure Direct (Pure Direct)

Use this feature to select whether this unit outputs the video signals when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode.
Choice Video Off Video On Functions
Does not output video signals. Outputs video signals. For the better sound quality, this unit only activates the limited video features.
Conversion (Video conversion)

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the video scaling as well as the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
Choice On Functions
Converts composite, S-video, and component video signals interchangeably and up-converts composite, Svideo, and component video signals to HDMI video signals. Does not convert any signals.
Advanced Operation
Note
You cannot use the GUI menu while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode even if Pure Direct is set to Video On.
Off
Notes
For optimal video performance, THX Ltd. recommends that you set Conversion to Off to allow video signals to pass through the system without processing (e.g., video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks without any processing). The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted into component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. If Conversion is set to Off, the Component I/P, HDMI Resolution, HDMI Processing, HDMI Aspect, and Short Message features are deactivated. Set Conversion to On to display the short message. This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals interchangeably. The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are converted into the S-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. Even when Conversion is set to On, HDMI digital signals are not converted to analog video signals. This unit cannot convert the signals input at the VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks and displays the video images correctly depending on the input source component and the source played on the component. In such cases, set Conversion to Off. When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a video game console) are input, this unit does not display short messages in the video monitor even if Conversion is set to On. When the analog component video signals with 480p/576p of resolution are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and the video monitor is connected to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack on this unit, the GUI screen is not displayed in the video monitor.
Channel Mute (Channel mute)

Use this feature to mute specific speaker channels. Mode (Mode) Use this feature to activate or deactivate the Channel Mute setting for each speaker.
Choice Disable Enable Functions
Deactivates the Channel Mute function. Activates the Channel Mute function.
Each speaker settings Select whether this unit mutes each speaker channel when you set Mode to Enable.
Choice Mute On Mute Off Functions
Mutes the selected speaker channel. Does not mute the selected speaker channel.
89 En
HDMI Processing (HDMI video processing)

Use this feature to select whether this unit processes the video signals input at the HDMI IN jacks.
Choice Off Functions
Select this setting when you do not want this unit to process the video signals input at the HDMI IN jacks even if Conversion is set to On. Select this setting when you want this unit to process the video signals input at the HDMI IN jacks when Conversion is set to On.
HDMI Aspect (HDMI aspect ratio)

Use this feature to select whether this unit converts the aspect ratio of 4:3 video signals and outputs at the HDMI OUT jacks.
Choice Through 16:9 Normal Functions
Does not make any adjustments to the aspect ratio for the HDMI video signal sources. Displays video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 on your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9. Black stripes appear on the right and left sides as a result. Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 to your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9. The signals
On
Smart Zoom
Component I/P (Component interlace/ progressive conversion)

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog interlace/ progressive conversion of the analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks so that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks.
Activates the analog interlace/progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals. Deactivates the analog interlace/progressive upconversion of the analog video signals.
are input with 720p, 1080i or 1080p of resolution, this setting does not affect the video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack.
Notes
When HDMI Resolution is set to Through, you cannot make any adjustments to HDMI Aspect. If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this unit automatically ignores the setting of HDMI Aspect. When HDMI Aspect is set to Smart Zoom, the video images of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched.
Short Message (Short message display)

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message display displayed in the main zone video monitor function.
Activates the short message display function. Deactivates the short message display function.
Notes
If your video monitor does not support analog video signals with 480p/576p of resolution, the GUI screen may not be displayed on your video monitor when Component I/P is set to On. In such a case, set INITIALIZE in Advanced setup parameter to VIDEO (see page 120). When you set HDMI Processing to On, you may not set Component I/P in some cases.
HDMI Resolution (HDMI video signal resolution)

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI up-scaling of the analog and HDMI video signals input at the composite video, Svideo and component video and HDMI IN jacks so that the upscaled video signals are output at the HDMI OUT jacks. This unit up-scales the analog video signals as follows: 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) 480p/576p, 1080i, 720p, or 1080p 480p/576p 1080i, 720p, or 1080p 1080i 480p/576p, 720p, 1080p 720p 480p/576p, 1080i, 1080p
Choice Through 480p (or 576p), 1080i, 720p, 1080p Functions
Does not up-scale any video signals. Up-scales video signals to 480p or 576p, 1080i, 720p, or 1080p of resolution.
Note
The short message display does not appear in the following cases: when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input when HDMI video signals are input
On Screen (On-screen display time)

Use this feature to set the time for which the iPod menu, or NET/ USB menu is displayed in the video monitor after you perform a certain operation.
Choice Always 10sec 30sec Functions
Displays the menu unceasingly during an operation. Turns off the menu 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. Turns off the menu 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation.
y
This setting is applied to the GUI menu in the main zone and OSD in Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4.
Position (GUI screen position)

Use this feature to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the GUI screen. Control range: 5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)
Short Message On Screen Position Wall Paper
+ / :0 / :0
Note
The input video signals may be down-scaled depending on the setting of HDMI Resolution.
90 En
Button 9 k 9 n 9 h 9 l
Up
Moving direction of the GUI display
Down Right Left
Main 11ch Stereo (Main zone 11-channel stereo) Use this feature to select whether the sound field program of the main zone is fixed to 11ch Stereo when this unit is in the party mode.
Select this setting to select the sound field program in the main zone as you like. Select this setting to fix the sound field program of the main zone to 11ch Stereo mode when this unit is in the party mode.
Wall Paper (Wall paper)

Use this feature to display the wall paper or gray background in your video monitor when there is no video signal being input.
Choice None Piano Functions
Does not display any background in your video monitor. Displays a background image (the photograph of a piano) in your monitor when there is no video signal being input. Displays a background image (the photograph of a horn) in your monitor when there is no video signal being input. Displays a background image (the photograph of an electric guitar) in your monitor when there is no video signal being input. Display a gray background in your monitor when there is no video signal being input.
Target : Zone2/Target : Zone3/Target : Zone4 (Party mode target zone setting) Use this feature to specify which zone joins to the party mode.
Choice Disable Descriptions
Select this setting not to join the selected zone to the party mode. You can select the input source of the selected zone independently even if this unit is in the party mode. Select this setting to join the selected zone to the party mode. When this unit is in the party mode, the zone which this unit plays back the same source as the main zone in the zones join in the party mode.
Horn
Electric Guitar
Enable
Gray
Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set/Zone4 Set (Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 settings)

Zone2 Volume/Zone3 Volume/Zone4 Volume (Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 volume) Use this menu to select whether this unit controls the volume level of the audio signals output at the ZONE OUT (ZONE2, ZONE3, or ZONE4) jacks. Advanced Operation
Choice Fixed Descriptions
Select this setting when you want to control the volume level of the selected zone on the external amplifier. This unit fixes the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level to a standard line level. Select this setting when you want to control the volume level of the selected zone on this unit. You can adjust the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level simultaneously with C VOLUME +/ on the remote control.
Note
When Conversion is set to Off, no background is displayed even if Wall Paper is set to other than None.
Manual Setup (Multi Zone)

Use this menu to set the functions of the multi-zone configuration.
Speaker B (Speaker B setting)

Use this feature to select the location of the FRONT B speakers.
Choice Main Descriptions
Select this setting when you use the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals in the main room. This unit outputs the same audio signals at the EXTRA SP terminals as the FRONT A speaker terminals. Select this setting when you use the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals in another room. When you turn off the FRONT A and FRONT B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and this unit outputs sounds at the FRONT B terminals only.
Variable
ZoneB
Notes
When Zone2 Volume, Zone3 Volume, or Zone4 Volume is set to Fixed, you cannot select the following parameters: Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol./Zone4 Max Vol. Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol./Zone4 Initial Vol. Zone2 Balance/Zone3 Balance/Zone4 Balance Even if you set Zone2 Volume to Variable, the volume control on this unit does not function to the output level of the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack (see page 113).
Notes
If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on this unit, the sound is output from both the headphones and the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals when Speaker B is set to ZoneB. If a sound field program is selected when Speaker B is set to ZoneB, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 60).
Zone SP Assign (Zone speaker assignment)

Use this feature to assign the speaker terminals for Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4. See page 116 for details.
Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol./Zone4 Max Vol. (Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 Maximum volume setting) Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4. Control range: 30.0 dB to +15 .0 dB, +16.5 dB Control step: 5.0 dB Note
The Zone2 Max Vol., Zone3 Max Vol., or Zone4 Max Vol. setting takes priority over the Zone2 Initial Vol., Zone3 Initial Vol., or Zone4 Initial Vol. setting. For example, Zone2 Initial Vol. is set to 20.0 dB and then Zone2 Max Vol. is set to 30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to 30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time.
Party Mode Set (Party mode settings)

The party mode enables you to play the same source in multiple zones simultaneously (see page 118). Use Party Mode Set menu to configure the functions of this unit when this unit is in the party mode.
91 En
Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol./Zone4 Initial Vol. (Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 initial volume setting) Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 when the power of each zone is turned on. Control range: Off, Mute, 80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Note
The Zone2 Max Vol., Zone3 Max Vol., or Zone4 Max Vol. setting takes priority over the Zone2 Initial Vol., Zone3 Initial Vol., Zone4 Initial Vol. setting.
Manual Setup (Network)

Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system parameters.
Configuration (Network configuration)

Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP address, etc.) or to change them manually. DHCP (DHCP setting) Use this feature to select whether this unit can obtain the network parameters (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, primary DNS server and secondary DNS server) from the DHCP server of the connected network.
Choice On Descriptions
Select this setting when this unit can obtain the network parameters from the DHCP server of the connected network. Select this setting when you set the network parameters manually.
Zone2 Balance/Zone3 Balance/Zone4 Balance (Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 balance) Use this feature to adjust the balance of the volume of the left and right channels in each zone. Choices: L10 to L1, 0, R1 to R10 Zone2 Mono/Zone3 Mono/Zone4 Mono (Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 monaural mode) Use this feature to select whether you play back sources monaurally in the selected zone.
Turns off the monaural playback mode. This unit plays back sources in stereo. Turns on the monaural playback mode. This unit mixes down the left and right channel signals and plays the sources monaurally.
Off
IP Address (IP address) Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for other devices in the target network. Subnet Mask (Subnet mask) Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value assigned to this unit. y
For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as 255.255.255.0.
Muting Type (Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 muting type) Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume of the selected zone.
Choice Full 20dB 40dB Functions
Mutes all the audio output. Reduces the current volume by 20 dB. Reduces the current volume by 40 dB.
Default Gateway (Default gateway) Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) (Primary DNS server) DNS Server (S) (Secondary DNS server) Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers. Note
If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in DNS Server (P). If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of them in DNS Server (P) and another in DNS Server (S).
Zone OSD (Zone on-screen display)

Use this feature to display the operational status of Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 on the Zone 2 video monitor connected to the ZONE VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of this unit. The Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 information to be displayed is listed as follows: The input source The volume level The audio mute status The tonal quality status iPod or network/USB menu when DOCK or NET/USB is selected as the input source of Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4
Choice Zone2 Zone All Functions
Displays the operational status of Zone 2 only. Displays the operational status of Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4.
Setup (Setup) Select Setup to confirm the settings of the Configuration parameters. Procedure of the network configuration
From the top GUI menu, press 9 k / n on the remote control repeatedly and then 9 h to select Configuration. Press 9 k / n repeatedly and then 9 h to select DHCP.
2
Notes
You can connect up to two composite and one component video monitors to the ZONE OUT VIDEO jacks and ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. If you connect multiple video monitors to the ZONE VIDEO and ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, these video monitors display the same video images of the input source of Zone 2. When you set Zone OSD to Zone All, the operational status of Zone 3 and Zone 4 appears on the Zone 2 video monitor(s) even if Zone 2 is turned off.
92 En
Press 9 k / n to select On or Off and then 9 ENTER to confirm.

If you select On, you do not have to set other network parameters. Refer to step 5 and finish the configuration. If you select Off, you need to set other network parameters. Refer to steps 4 through 6 to set the parameters.
System (System ID) This information displays the system ID that is assigned to this unit.
Manual Setup (Option)

This menu adjusts the optional system settings.
Note
When DHCP is set to On, you cannot select and adjust any other network settings. To specify the other parameters, you need to first set DHCP to Off.
Front Panel Disp. (Front panel display setting)

Dimmer (Dimmer) Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: 4 to 0
4 5
Press 9 k / n to select the desired parameter and then 9 h. Press 9 l / h repeatedly to select the digit to change and then press 9 k / n repeatedly to change the number. Press 9 ENTER to confirm the setting of the parameter. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to configure each network parameter. Press 9 n repeatedly to select Setup and then 9 ENTER to finish configuration.
Dimmer Scroll
6 7 8
Scroll (Front panel display message scroll) Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as song title or channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when DOCK, or NET/USB is selected as the input source.
Choice Continue Functions
Continuous mode. Select this to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner.
Note
In case you have changed your network configuration, you may need to reconfigure the network settings again.
Advanced Operation
Once
y
You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory settings by using NETWORK of INITIALIZE in the advanced setup menu (see page 120).
Scroll-once mode. Select this to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once.
Information (Network information)

Use this feature to display the network system information.
iPod (iPod settings)

Standby Charge (iPod charge on the standby mode) Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode (see page 64).
Choice Auto Off Functions
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby mode. Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only when this unit is turned on.
Configuration Information
MAC Address 00:00:00:00:00:00 Status 100BASE-TX Full Duplex System ABCDE123
Note
The above display is an example.
MAC Address (MAC (Media Access Control) address) This information displays the MAC address that is assigned to this unit. Status (Network status) This information displays the current link status of the network. Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, No Link, Full Duplex, Half Duplex Note
No Link appears when network connection is not made.
Audio Select (Default audio input jack select)

Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select setting (see page 81) for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
Choice Auto Last Functions
Automatically detects the type of audio input signals and selects the appropriate audio input jack select setting. Automatically selects the last audio input jack select setting used for the connected input source.
93 En
Decoder Mode (Default decoder mode)

Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode (see page 82) for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit.
Automatically detects the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode setting. Automatically selects the last decoder mode setting used for the connected input source.
Choice Off On
Functions
Does not accept the HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode. Accepts the HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode.
Notes
When Standby Through is set to On and this unit is in the standby mode, the audio signals are only output at the HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2. When Standby Through is set to On, the amount of power consumption in the standby mode is increase. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time, press B MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit.
EXTD Surround (Default extended surround decoder mode setting)

Use this feature to designate the extended surround decoder mode (see page 72) for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
Automatically detects the input digital audio signals and activates the appropriate decoder. Selects the last selected extended surround decoder mode.
Input/output jack select When Standby Through is set to On, you can designate an HDMI IN jack and an HDMI OUT jack that accept the signals when this unit in the standby mode. Input (HDMI IN jack select) Use this feature to select an HDMI IN jack select that accepts HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode.
Choice IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 FRONT
HDMI IN1 HDMI IN2 HDMI IN3 HDMI IN4 Front HDMI IN
Memory Guard (Memory guard)

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound field program parameter values and other system settings.
Turns off the Memory Guard feature. Protects the following parameters: sound field program parameters GUI menu parameters speaker levels settings
Selected HDMI IN jack
y
When you select the protected parameter, appears at the bottom left of the GUI screen. You can adjust the parameters when you select the parameter and does not appear at the bottom left of the GUI menu even if Memory Guard is set to On.
Output (HDMI OUT jack select) Use this feature to select an HDMI OUT jack select that outputs HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode.
Choice OUT 1 OUT 2 Selected HDMI OUT jack
HDMI OUT1 HDMI OUT2
HDMI Set (HDMI settings)

Use this feature to adjust the HDMI support audio. Support Audio (Support audio) Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
Choice DSP-Z11 Functions
Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI input jacks on this unit are not output to the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. Plays back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Trigger Output (Trigger output)

Use this feature to select the functions of each TRIGGER OUT jack on this unit.
Choice Trigger1 Trigger2 Function
Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack. Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack.
Trigger operation mode

Choice Power Descriptions
Select this setting to send the voltage signals at the selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the selected zone is turned on. Select this setting to send the voltage signals at the selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the selected input source is selected. Select this setting to send the voltage signals manually.
Other
Note
Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of each connected component.
Source
Standby Through (Standby through) Use this feature whether this unit allows the HDMI signals input at the HDMI IN jacks to pass thorough this unit when this unit is in the standby mode. You can also designate an HDMI IN jack and an HDMI OUT jack that accept the signals when Standby Through is set to On and this unit is in the standby mode.
Manual
94 En
Source (Source) After selecting the input source, you can set the function of the TRIGGER OUT jacks when the corresponding input source is selected.
Choice Input High Input Low Descriptions
Sends the voltage when you select the input source you set in Source. Stops sending the voltage when you select the input source you set in Source.
HDMI error and message

Message Device Over Cause
The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. HDCP authentication failed.
Out of Resolution
The connected monitor is not compatible with the resolution of the input video signal.
Language
Manual (Manual)
Choice High Low Function
Sends the voltage signals. Stops sending the voltage signals.
Use this feature to select the language of the menu items and messages. (Japanese), Choices: English (English), Franais (French), Deutsch (German), Espaol (Spanish), (Russian) y
You can also select the language using the LANGUAGE parameter in Advanced setup in the front panel display (see page 120).
Signal Info. (Input signal information)

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
Language
(Russian)
GUI menu
Front panel display
Zone OSD
Audio Info. (Audio information)

Format
Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as 3/2/0.1. The number of bits passing a given point per second. The dialogue normalization level preset to the current input bitstream signal (see page 131). Flag data encoded in the bitstream, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders (Surround EX, etc.).
(Japanese) Other languages
Sampling
Channel
The selected language is displayed. The selected language is not displayed. The menu items and messages are displayed in English.
Advanced Operation
Bitrate Dialogue
Flag1/Flag2
Notes
appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding information. Some high definition audio bitstream contents may not include the discrete surround back left and right channel signals but are encoded at the bitrate of 192 kHz. Even if you make settings to output bitstreams directly, some players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams, while converting the DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio bitstreams to the DTS bitstreams.
Video Info. (Video information)

HDMI Signal
Type of the source video signals and the video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack on this unit. Resolution of the input signal (analog or HDMI) and the output signal (HDMI). Resolution of the source video signals and the analog video signals output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit. Error message for HDMI sources or connected HDMI devices. See page 124 for details.
HDMI Resolution
Analog Resolution
HDMI Error (HDMI Message)
95 En
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)

Use this feature to save and recall up to 10 of your favorite setting for the main zone. You can also save up to four of your favorite settings for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4.
Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select System Memory and then press 9 h. The System Memory menu appears in the video monitor.
Saving the current system settings

Main Zone2 Zone3 Main Load Main Save Main Rename
Saving by the 7 SYSTEM MEMORY buttons

You can save the current system settings stored in Memory1 to Memory4 by pressing the corresponding 7 SYSTEM MEMORY buttons. Press and hold one of the 7 SYSTEM MEMORY buttons on the remote control for 4 seconds. MEMORY 1 SAVE (example) appears in the front panel display, and then this unit saves the current system setting to the corresponding memory number.
SYSTEM MEMORY
Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the desired zone and then press 9 h. In the following example, you select Main (main zone). The list of the memory number appears in the video monitor.
Main Load Main Save Memory1 Memory2 Memory3
Main Rename
Notes
If system settings are already saved in the selected memory number, this unit overwrites the old system settings. To save the system settings for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4, press H ZONE on the remote control repeatedly to select the operation zone setting of the remote control and then press and hold the desired 7 SYSTEM MEMORY button for 4 seconds. You can save the system settings for the selected Zone only when the zone is turned on. This unit saves the parameters in the groups you select by using the GUI menu when you save the parameters by using the 7 SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.
Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select Main Save and then press 9 h. The following menu appears in the video monitor.
Main Save Input/HDMI Out Audio Volume SP Config Video Option Save
Saving by the GUI menu operation

You can save the current system settings stored in Memory1 to Memory10 by using the System Memory menu in the GUI menu.
Memory1 Memory2 Memory3
Press I MENU on the remote control. The top menu appears in the video monitor.
Group of the system parameters
5
Stereo/Surround Input Select Manual Setup Auto Setup System Memory Volume Sound Video
Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the desired memory number (Memory1 to Memory10 or Memory4) and then press 9 h. The list of the saved items appears in the video monitor.
Main Save Input/HDMI Out Audio Volume SP Config Video Option Save Select: ENTER
96 En
y
If you select Zone2, Zone3, or Zone4 in step 3, you can select Memory1 to Memory4. You can save the parameters for the selected zone only when the zone is turned on. If system settings are already saved in the selected memory number, this unit overwrite to old system settings. If you save the system settings to Memory1 to Memory4, you can load the stored settings by pressing the corresponding 7 SYSTEM MEMORY buttons (see page 98).
Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select Main Rename (example) and then 9 h. The list of the memory number appears in the video monitor. Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the desired memory number and then 9 h. The rename display appears in the video monitor.
Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the group of parameters and then press 9 ENTER to select or clear the check box of the group. This unit saves the parameters in the checked groups. Refer to Saved parameters for the main zone on page 98.
CAPITAL Memory1 Memory2 Memory1 OK RESET
Main Save Input/HDMI Out Audio Volume SP Config Video Option Save Select: ENTER
Memory3
Press 9 ENTER repeatedly to select a character type (CAPITAL/SMALL/LATIN CAPITAL/LATIN SMALL/ FIGURE/MARK). Press 9 k / n to select the character you want to use and 9 l / h to move to the next one. You can use up to 9 characters for each memory. Press 9 n to change the character in the following order, or press 9 k to go in the reverse order: CAPITAL A to Z, space SMALL a to z, space LATIN CAPITAL , , , etc. LATIN SMALL , , , etc. FIGURE 0 to 9, space MARK !, #, %, &, etc. Press 9 ENTER to switch between character types. y
Press 9 h repeatedly to select RESET and then press 9 ENTER to set the name of the memory to the initial name.
Current selected group of the parameters appears in red
Note
If the selected zone is other than Main, you can select Input, Volume, and Tone Control. See page 98 for details.
Press 9 n repeatedly to select Save and then 9 ENTER to save the current system settings to the selected memory number.
Advanced Operation
Main Save Input/HDMI Out Audio Volume SP Config Video Option Save Save: ENTER
Notes
The character types you can select differ depending on the setting in Language (see page 95). If you set Language to , you can also select Japanese characters.
y
You can cancel the saving by pressing 9 l.
Press I MENU again to exit from the GUI menu.
Press 9 h repeatedly to select OK and press 9 ENTER when complete. y Repeat steps 5 to 7 to rename each input.
Renaming the stored settings

Use this feature to rename the stored settings. The name of each memory number appears in the GUI menu or front panel display.
Press I MENU again to exit from the GUI menu.
1 2
Press I MENU on the remote control. The top menu appears in the video monitor. Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select System Memory and then press 9 h. The System Memory menu appears in the video monitor. Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the desired zone and then press 9 h. In the following example, Main is selected.
Note
If you change the setting of Language (see page 95) or LANGUAGE (see page 120), the name of each system memory are automatically set to the initial name of the selected language.
97 En
Saved parameters for the main zone

The groups of the system parameters indicated in bold are the groups that is saved in the initial setting. Group
Input/HDMI Out * Audio Select Decoder Mode
Input source
Saved parameters for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4

Parameter Input Descriptions
Input source * Volume level Tone control settings
Page
117 117 117
Parameters
Page
82 82 50 77 61 72 86 86 86 87 88 89 60 50 87 87 83 84 85 86 91 45 44 51 89 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 91 88 93 94
Volume Tone Control
Note
* The playing status of the network/USB sources (selected radio station, etc.) is also saved.
HDMI OUT SEL Audio Stereo/Surround

Pure Direct on/off EXTD SUR. setting
Loading the stored system settings

Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to F AMP. This unit overwrites the stored settings to the current settings of this unit. If you do not want to erase the current settings, save the current settings to any System Memory number in advance.
Adaptive DRC Adaptive DSP Lvl LFE Level Dynamic Range Tone Control Pure Direct
CINEMA DSP HD ON/OFF
Loading by the 7 SYSTEM MEMORY buttons

You can recall the system settings stored in Memory1 to Memory4 by pressing the corresponding 7 SYSTEM MEMORY buttons. y
To recall the system settings for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4, press H ZONE on the remote control repeatedly to select the operation zone setting of the remote control in advance. You can recall the system settings for the selected zone only when the zone is turned on.
Volume SP Config
Volume level S-Wave Control Parametric EQ THX Set Speaker Set Speaker Distance Speaker Level Speaker B Information (Auto Setup) Setup Menu (Auto Setup) Selected front speaker set (A and/or B)
Press one of the 7 SYSTEM MEMORY buttons on the remote control to select the desired memory number. MEMORY 1 LOAD (example) appears in the front panel display. y
EMPTY appears in the menu screen if no system settings are stored in the selected memory number.
Video
Conversion HDMI Processing Component I/P HDMI Resolution HDMI Aspect Short Message On Screen Position Wall Paper
Press the selected 7 SYSTEM MEMORY button once more to confirm the selection. This unit loads the settings stored in the selected memory number.
Loading by the GUI menu operation
1 2
Press I MENU on the remote control. The top menu appears in the video monitor. Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select System Memory and then press 9 h. The System Memory menu appears in the video monitor. Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the desired zone and then press 9 h. In the following example, you select Main (main zone). The list of the memory number appears in the video monitor.
Option
Lipsync Front Panel Disp. Support Audio
Note
* The playing status of the network/USB sources (selected radio station, etc.) is also saved.
Main Load Main Save Main Rename
98 En
Note
You can recall the system settings for the selected zone only when the zone is turned on.
Using examples
Example 1: Switching the settings of this unit according to the using situations
Use the following example to change the settings of this unit according to the using situations just by pressing the 7 SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.
SYSTEM MEMORY 3 Settings for the book-reading time SYSTEM MEMORY 4 Settings for enjoying games
Press 9 k / n to select Main Load and then press 9 h. The following menu appears in the video monitor.
Main Save Input/HDMI Out Audio Volume SP Config Video Option
SYSTEM MEMORY
y
If system settings are already stored in the selected memory number, the stored system parameter settings appear in the menu screen. Memory Empty appears in the menu screen if no system settings are stored in the selected memory number.
SYSTEM MEMORY 1 Settings for enjoying movie
SYSTEM MEMORY 2 Settings for enjoying TV programs
Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the desired memory number where the system settings are stored and then press 9 h. Once Load: ENTER appears in the video monitor, press 9 ENTER to confirm the loading. y
You can cancel the loading by pressing 9 l.
SYSTEM MEMORY 1: Settings for enjoying movie Save the following settings to enjoy movies. You can switch the input source, sound field program, and the HDMI OUT jack simultaneously. Recommended parameter settings Input source: BD/HD DVD (see page 50) HDMI OUT SEL setting: OUT 2 (see page 51) Sound field program: Sci-Fi (see page 54) Dimmer: 4 (see page 93) Saved parameter groups Input/HDMI Out, Audio, Option SYSTEM MEMORY 2: Settings for enjoying TV programs When you want to play back the audio signals input at the CBL/ SAT HDMI IN 3 jack on the speakers of the TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack to enjoy TV programs, use the following settings. You can set input source and output component of the audio signals simultaneously. Recommended parameter settings Input source: CBL/SAT (see page 50) HDMI OUT SEL setting: OUT 1 (see page 51) Support Audio setting: Other (see page 94) Saved parameter groups Input/HDMI Out, Audio SYSTEM MEMORY 3: Settings for the book-reading time When you enjoy reading books with listening to your favorite Internet radio service, use the following settings. You can recall the desired input source, Internet radio service, and audio settings simultaneously. Recommended parameter settings Input source: NET/USB (Net Radio) (see page 50) Sound field program: 11ch Enhancer (see page 54) Volume level: Slightly low (see page 50) y
Before saving the settings, select the desired Internet radio service (see page 69).
Main Save Input/HDMI Out Audio Volume SP Config Video Option Save Load: ENTER
Advanced Operation
Press I MENU to exit from the GUI menu.
Saved parameter groups Input/HDMI Out, Audio, Volume
99 En
SYSTEM MEMORY 4: Settings for enjoying games Save the following settings to enjoy roleplaying games. You can switch the input source, sound field program, and the HDMI OUT jack simultaneously. Recommended parameter settings Input source: V-AUX (see page 50) Sound field program: Roleplaying Game (see page 54) HDMI OUT SEL setting: OUT 2 (see page 51) Saved parameter groups Input/HDMI Out, Audio
Example 2: Switching the setting of this unit according to the environment of the listening room
Use the following example to change the speaker and audio settings according to the environment of the listening room and the situation.
SYSTEM MEMORY
SYSTEM MEMORY 1 Settings for a single listening position
SYSTEM MEMORY 2 Settings for multiple listening positions
SYSTEM MEMORY 3 Settings for the midnight listening
SYSTEM MEMORY 1: Settings for a single listening position Save the result of the automatic setup for a single listening position. Recommended parameter settings Automatic setup: The result when you perform the measurement for the single listening position (see page 42). Saved parameter group SP Config SYSTEM MEMORY 2: Settings for multiple listening positions Save the result of the automatic setup for the multiple listening positions. Recommended parameter settings Automatic setup: The result when you perform the measurement for the multiple listening positions (see page 42). Saved parameter group SP Config SYSTEM MEMORY 3: Settings for the midnight listening The acoustic characteristics may change whether curtains are opened or closed. Use the following settings for the listening when you want to enjoy movies in midnight with low volume level. Recommended parameter settings Automatic setup: The result when you perform the measurement with the curtains are closed (see page 42). Adaptive DRC setting: Auto (see page 86) Adaptive DSP Lvl setting: Auto (see page 86) Saved parameter groups Audio, SP Config
100 En
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser (Web Control Center)
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser (Web Control Center)
You can operate this unit by using a Web browser. You can select the input source and sound field program, browse the iPod or network/USB contents, select the preset items, and adjust the parameters of this unit by using the graphical user interface (Web Control Center) that appears in the Web browser. Check the IP address of this unit by using IP Address in Network menu (see page 92) in advance, and then enter the IP address to the Web browser to access this unit to control it.
PC
Web browser
Control This unit
Selecting the input source
Controlling Network/ USB features
Power on/off
Adjusting the system parameters
And many other features...
Advanced Operation
y
To use this feature, this unit and your PC must be connected properly in the network. See page 37 for details of the connections. We recommend that you use Windows Internet Explorer 6 or 7 that is installed on Windows XP or Windows Vista PC to access this unit. You can select whether this unit accepts the controls by using the Web browser when this unit is in the standby mode. See page 119 for details. You can register the MAC address of the PCs you want to use to control this unit and limit the PCs that can control this unit by using the Web browser. You can select that this unit allows the access to this unit by the PCs whose MAC addresses are registered to this unit or allows the access by any PCs by using MAC FILTER in Advanced setup (see page 120).
101 En
Remote control features

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 104).
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

Controlling this unit
Set the operation mode selector to F AMP to control this unit.
Controlling a TV
Set the operation mode selector to F TV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code to the TV control area in advance (see page 104).
POWER TV
POWER AV
STANDBY
POWER
V-AUX
PHONO
MD TAPE CD-R
*1
*1
POWER TV
POWER AV
STANDBY
POWER
V-AUX
PHONO
MD TAPE CD-R
DVD
CD
DVD
CD
DTV
DVR NET USB
VCR
DTV
DVR NET USB
VCR
DOCK
DOCK
Set to AMP
SELECT SETUP ID MACRO MODE
AMP TV SOURCE
Set to TV
SETUP
ID
ZONE
SYSTEM MEMORY
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
LEVEL TITLE BAND
1
LEVEL TITLE BAND
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
*2
RETURN MEMORY PC/MCX REC NET RADIO
ENTER
A-E
*1
MUTE
*2
RETURN MEMORY PC/MCX REC
ENTER
A-E
DISPLAY
DISPLAY MUTE
USB
NET RADIO
USB
ENTERTAIN 4
ENTERTAIN 4
*2 *3
MOVIE 5 THX 9 PARTY TV VOL
STEREO 6
*2
Notes
*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the operation mode selector position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component operation mode selector is set to F AMP.
Notes
*1 2 TV POWER can always turn on or off the power of the TV regardless of the operation mode selector position. *2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to F TV. For details, see the TV column on page 103. *3 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to F TV or F SOURCE. Remote control TV VOL +/ TV CH +/ TV MUTE TV INPUT Functions
Increases or decreases the volume level. Changes the currently selected channel. Mutes the audio output. Switches the input source.
y
If no code has been set to the TV area, the remote control operates the component that is set to the DTV area (see page 104).
102 En
Controlling other components

Set the operation mode selector to F SOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons or (3 ). You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 104). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button or (3 ). Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. y
The remote control has 16 modes (control areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 16 different components.
[1]
POWER TV
POWER AV
STANDBY
POWER
[2] [3] [4] [5]
LEVEL TITLE BAND
PRESET/CH
[7]
V-AUX
PHONO
MD TAPE CD-R
ENTER
A-E
DVD
CD
RETURN MEMORY PC/MCX REC NET RADIO USB
DISPLAY MUTE
DTV
DVR NET USB
VCR
[8]
DOCK
ENTERTAIN 4
SETUP
ID
SYSTEM MEMORY
[6]
MOVIE 5 THX 9 PARTY TV VOL
STEREO 6
1
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE VOLUME
[9] [10]
Set to SOURCE
Blu-ray Disc/ HD DVD player/ DVD player recorder

[1] [2] [3] AV POWER TITLE, BAND PRESET/CH k PRESET/CH n A-E l A-E h ENTER [4] [5] RETURN, MEMORY REC e p s ll hh b a [6] [7] [8] [9] 1-9, 0, +10 Power *1 Title Menu up Menu down Menu left Menu right Menu enter Return Record (recorder) Pause Play Stop Search backward Search forward Skip backward Skip forward Numeric buttons Power *1 Title Menu up Menu down Menu left Menu right Menu enter Return Disc skip Pause Play Stop Search backward
LD player
Power *1
DVD recorder/ Digital video VCR recorder

Power *1 Title Menu up Menu down Menu left Menu right Menu enter Return Record Record Pause Play Stop Search backward Search forward Skip backward Skip forward Numeric buttons Channel up Power *1
TV
DVR power *2 Title Menu up
Cable TV/ CD player Satellite tuner

Power *1 Power *1
MD recorder/ Tape deck CD recorder

Power *1 Power *1
Tuner
Power *1 Band
Channel up Channel down
Menu up Menu down Menu left Direction A/B Menu right Menu enter Memory Record Pause Play Stop Search backward Record Pause Play Stop
Channel down Menu down Menu left Menu right Menu enter Return
DVR record *2 DVR record *2 Disc skip DVR pause *2 DVR play *2 DVR stop *2 DVR search backward *2 DVR search forward *2 DVR skip backward *2 DVR skip forward *2 DVR pause *2 DVR play *2 DVR stop *2 DVR search backward *2 DVR search forward *2 DVR skip backward *2 DVR skip forward *2 Pause Play Stop Search backward
Pause Play Stop Search backward
Pause Play Stop Search backward
Advanced Operation
Search backward Search forward
Search forward Search forward Search forward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward
Search forward Search forward
Skip backward Skip backward Direction A Skip forward Skip forward Direction B Numeric buttons Search mode
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Menu Display Index Audio Display Chapter/time Audio Menu Display Index Audio
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Menu
MENU, Menu SRCH MODE DISPLAY ENT Display Index Audio
Display Enter
Display Enter
Display Enter
Display Index
Display Index
Display Enter
[10] AUDIO
Notes
*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. *2 These buttons operate your video recorder (DVD recorder etc.) only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 104).
Selecting a component to be controlled

You can select a component to be controlled independently of the input source selected with the input selector buttons or . Press 5 SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the desired component. The name of the component to be controlled appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control.
Controlling optional components (Option mode)

OPTN1 and OPTN2 are optional component control areas that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This areas are useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the option mode, press 5 SELECT l / h repeatedly until OPTN1 or OPTN2 appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control. Note
You cannot set a remote control code for the optional component control areas. See page 105 to program buttons operated within these component control areas.
DVD
103 En
Customizing the remote control

Use the setup mode of the remote control to customize the remote control.
Press 9 k / n to select the desired setting.

Choice
ON
Descriptions
Lights up the backlight when a button is pressed or the remote control detects a motion. Lights up the backlight only when 6 LIGHT is pressed.
Press G SETUP on the remote control using a ballpoint pen or similar object. SETUP appears in the display window on the remote control. Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the desired setup mode.
Descriptions
Top setup mode menu. Learning mode. Use this feature to program codes from other remote controls. Preset mode. Use this feature to change the remote control code of each control area. Renaming mode. Use this feature to change the name of each control area. Macro programming mode. Use this feature to set the macro program. Clearing mode. Use this feature to clear the configurations of this unit. Erase mode. Use this feature to erase the learned functions of each button. Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the authorized custom installers only. Backlight mode. Use this feature to set the light up mode of the remote control.
Page
OFF
4 5
y
Press 9 ENTER to confirm the setting. OK appears in the display window (4 ). Press G SETUP again to exit from the setup mode.
Setup mode SETUP LEARN P-SET RNAME MACRO CLEAR ERASE EX-IR LIGHT
105 104 106 108 109 109 104
You can light up the backlight by pressing 6 LIGHT anytime.
Setting remote control codes (P-SET)

You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each control area. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to List of remote control codes at the end of this manual. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each control area. Remote control code default settings
Control area MULTI V-AUX Library (component category) DVD MD DVD DVD CD CD-R DVR SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE TAPE
Manufacturer
Default code 04306 00409 04306 04306 01105 01405 00707 00012 00012 00012 00311
Yamaha Yamaha Yamaha Yamaha Yamaha Yamaha Yamaha Yamaha Yamaha Yamaha Yamaha
After the configurations, press G SETUP again to exit from the setup menu. Note
If you do not complete each of the operations within 30 seconds, this unit automatically exits from the setup menu.
PHONO MD TAPE BD HD DVD DVD CD
Setting the backlight mode of the remote control (LIGHT)

You can set the backlight mode of the remote control.
CD-R CBL SAT DTV DVR VCR TUNER DOCK NET USB (TAPE) TV
Press G SETUP on the remote control using a ballpoint pen or similar object. SETUP appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control. Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select LIGHT and then press 9 ENTER. LIGHT and the current LIGHT setting appears in the display window (4 ) alternately.
LIGHT
ON
Current LIGHT setting
Note
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code.
104 En
Press G SETUP on the remote control using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The remote control enters the setup menu. SETUP appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control. Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select P-SET and then press 9 ENTER. The remote control enters the preset mode. P-SET and name of the currently selected control area appears in the display window (4 ) alternately. Set the operation mode selector to G SOURCE and then press an input selector button or (3 ) or 5 SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the control area you want to customize. P-SET and name of the selected control area appears in the display window (4 ) alternately.
Notes
ERROR appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the learning feature (see Programming codes from other remote controls (LEARN) on page 105) or use the remote control supplied with the component. Functions programmed using the learning mode take priority over remote control code functions. If you set 00012 as the remote control code of the selected control area, you can operate the currently selected internal source (DOCK, or NET/USB).
Programming codes from other remote controls (LEARN)

You can program remote control codes from other remote controls. Use the learning feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program the function of other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas in the following illustration. The buttons can be programmed independently for each control area.
SYSTEM MEMORY
P-SET
y
DVD
If you want to select TV, set the operation mode selector to F TV.
1
LEVEL TITLE BAND
PRESET/CH
Press 9 ENTER. The five-digit code set for the selected control area appears in the display window (4 ).
V-AUX
PHONO
MD TAPE CD-R RETURN MEMORY PC/MCX REC

AMP
ENTER
A-E
DVD
CD
DTV
DVR NET USB
VCR
DISPLAY MUTE
DOCK
04306
Note
00000 appears in the display window (4 ) if no code has been set.
TV SOURCE SELECT MACRO
SETUP
ID
Set to SOURCE
NET RADIO
USB
ENTERTAIN 4
Advanced Operation
Press the numeric buttons (B ) to enter the five-digit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to List of remote control codes at the end of this manual. y
You can also enter the desired number by pressing 9 k / n / l / h repeatedly.
Notes
The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control. You cannot program the desired remote control code even if you select the buttons in the highlighted area in the above illustration depending on the selected control area and the assigned library.
Press 9 ENTER to set the number. OK appears in the display window (4 ) if setting was successful. NG appears in the display window (4 ) if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. y
If you continuously want to set up another code for another control area, repeat steps 3 through 6.
Set the operation mode selector to F SOURCE and then press an input selector button or (3 ) to select the desired control area. The name of the control area you want to customize appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control. y
You can also select the desired control area by pressing 5 SELECT l / h repeatedly. If you want to select TV, set the operation mode selector to F TV.
7 8
Press G SETUP again to exit from the setup mode. Press A p or 2 AV POWER to confirm whether you can control your component using the remote control.
Note
Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to F SOURCE or F TV. When you set the operation mode selector to F AMP and program a remote control codes from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this unit.
y
If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one.
Press G SETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar object. SETUP appears in the display window (4 ).
105 En
Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select LEARN and then press 9 ENTER. The remote control enters the learning mode. LEARN and the name of the selected control area appears in the display window (4 ) alternately.
Notes
ERROR appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, FULL may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. Learning may not be possible in the following cases: when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. when the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. when the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon.
START
4
DVD
Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other and then press 9 ENTER. LKEY appears in the display window (4 ).
Other remote control
POWER
Changing source names in the display window (RNAME)

You can change the name of the control area (input source) that appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This feature is useful when you have set an control area to control a different component.
106 En
RETURN MEMORY ENTER DISPLAY MUTE
MULTI
BD HD DVD
TUNER
LEVEL TITLE BAND PRESET/CH SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU
CBL SAT
TV
1
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
SELECT SETUP ID
POWER
V-AUX
DOCK NET USB
DVD
DTV DVR
AV
STANDBY
PHONO
CD
Press the button for which you want to program the new function. START appears in the display window (4 ).
POWER RETURN MEMORY ENTER DISPLAY A-E
SELECT
Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until OK appears in the display window (4 ). NG appears in the display window (4 ) if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
POWER MULTI BD HD DVD TUNER CBL SAT TV
y
When you want to program another function, repeat steps 4 and 6. When you continuously want to program another function for another control area, set the operation mode selector to F SOURCE and then press 5 SELECT l / h repeatedly and then repeat steps 4 through 6. If you want to select TV as the control area, set the operation mode selector to F TV and then repeat steps 4 through 6.
Press G SETUP again to exit the setup menu.
A-E SYSTEM MEMORY

MODE ZONE
MACRO SOURCE AMP TV
MODE
POWER
MD TAPE
CD-R
VCR
ZONE
1
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
Set the operation mode selector to F SOURCE and then press an input selector button or (3 ) to select the desired control area. The name of the control area you want to customize appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control.
BD/HD
2
Press G SETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar object. SETUP appears in the display window. Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select RNAME and then press 9 ENTER. The remote control enters the renaming mode. RNAME and the name of the selected control area appears in the display window alternately.
MULTI
TUNER
BD HD DVD
LEVEL TITLE BAND PRESET/CH SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU DOCK
CBL SAT
TV
1
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
SELECT SETUP ID
POWER
V-AUX
DOCK NET USB
DVD
DTV DVR
AV
STANDBY
PHONO
CD
MACRO SOURCE AMP TV
MODE
POWER
MD TAPE
CD-R
VCR
4
DTV
ZONE
RNAME
y
BD/HD
POWER
V-AUX
DVD
AV
SETUP ID MACRO SOURCE AMP TV
You can change the renamed control area by pressing an input selector button or (3 ) or 5 SELECT l / h repeatedly.
STANDBY
PHONO
NET USB
DVR VCR
CD CD-R
POWER
MD TAPE
Other remote control
Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select 3-letter name or 5letter name you want to edit. Each control area has both 3-letter name and 5-letter name. You can rename the 3-letter name and 5-letter name independently.
3-letter name 5-letter name
BD
BD/HD
Press 9 ENTER. The edit screen of the name of the currently selected control area appears in the display window (4 ).
Macro programming features

The macro programming feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The macro programming feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 108).
BD/HD
6 7
Press 9 l / h repeatedly to move the cursor (_) to the position you want to edit. Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select and enter the desired character. Pressing 9 k changes the character as follows: A to Z, a to z, 0, 1 to 9, space, - (minus), + (plus), / (slash) and : (colon). y
Pressing 9 n changes the characters in reverse order.
Recalling programmed macro-operations

V-AUX
PHONO
MD TAPE CD-R
Macro buttons
DVD
CD
DTV
DVR NET USB
VCR
DOCK
SETUP
ID
8 9
MACRO
Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you change all the letters you want. Press 9 ENTER to set the new name. OK appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control if renaming was successful. y
When you want to rename the another name of the selected control area, press the input selector button (3 ) or 5 SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the desired control area and then press 9 ENTER and then carry out the operations of steps 4 through 9.
SYSTEM MEMORY
Press H MACRO on the remote control.
MACRO
2
Press the desired macro button. M:the 3-letter name of the selected control area (for example, M:DVD) appears in the display window (4 ), and this unit transmits the programmed functions. When you press D STANDBY or E POWER, M:STB or M:PWR appears in the display window (4 ), and this unit transmits the programmed functions. Press H MACRO again to exit from the macrooperation mode. Advanced Operation
10
Press G SETUP again to exit the setup menu. The new name of the control area appears in the display window (4 ).
HDDVD
Note
ERROR appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously.
Notes
While the remote control is running a macro program, it does not accept any other operation until it has completed running the program (the transmission indicator in the display stops flashing). Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. If you do not complete each of the operations within 30 seconds, this unit automatically exits from the macro-operation mode.
107 En
Default macro functions

Pressing macro
STANDBY
To automatically transmit these signals First Second

STANDBY
POWER TV
POWER
(*1)
Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select MACRO and then press 9 ENTER. The remote control enters the macro-programming mode. MACRO and M:the three-letter name of the selected control area (for example, M:DVD) appears in the display window (4 ) alternately.
MULTI
MULTI
MACRO
3
M:DVD
V-AUX
V-AUX
PHONO
PHONO
MD TAPE
MD TAPE
BD HD DVD
BD HD DVD
DVD
DVD
Press the desired macro button you want to assign the macro program to and then press 9 ENTER. M:the three-letter name of the selected macro button (for example, M:DVD) and the name of the currently selected control area appears in the display window (4 ) alternately. When you press D STANDBY or E POWER, M:STB or M:PWR and the name of the currently selected control area appears in the display window (4 ) alternately. Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. Example Set the input source to DVD Turn on the DVD player Turn on the video monitor Step 1 (MCR1): Press DVD. Step 2 (MCR2): Press AV POWER. Step 3 (MCR3): Press TV POWER.
CD
CD
POWER
CD-R CD-R
CBL SAT
CBL SAT
DTV
DTV
DVR
DVR
VCR
VCR
TUNER
TUNER
MULTI BD HD DVD
3
V-AUX
2
PHONO MD TAPE CD-R
DVD
CD
DOCK
DOCK
1
CBL SAT DTV DVR NET USB VCR
NET USB
NET USB
(*2)
TUNER
DOCK
*1 Set the appropriate remote control code for TV in advance (see page 104). *2 This unit plays the last received station or selected contents before the unit was set in the standby mode.
MCR 1 M:DVD DVD

Notes
Indicates the number of macro steps entered
Programming macro operations (MACRO)

You can program your own macro and use the macro programming feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. Notes
The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. We do not recommend that you program continuous operations (for example, volume control) in a macro.
(Selected macro button)
Flashes alternately so you can set the next step
(Selected control area)
Press G SETUP on the remote control using a ballpoint pen or similar object. SETUP appears in the display window (4 ).
To change the selected input area, press 5 SELECT l / h. Pressing the input selector buttons or will program a macro step, whereas 5 SELECT l / h only changes the selected input area. The position of the operation mode selector (AMP/TV/SOURCE) affects the assigned function. When the operation mode selector is set to F AMP or F TV, the input source selectors do not function.
Press H MACRO to confirm the program. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, FULL appears and the remote control automatically exits from the macro programming mode.
108 En
Press G SETUP again to exit from the setup mode.
Notes
NG appears in the display window (4 ) if clearing was unsuccessful. ERROR appears in the display window (4 ) if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously.
Note
ERROR appears in the display window (B ) if you press more than one button simultaneously.
Clearing configurations
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, macros, renamed control area names and setup remote control ID.
Clearing a learned function (ERASE)
Clearing function sets (CLEAR)
Press G SETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar object. SETUP appears in the display window (4 ). Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select ERASE and then press 9 ENTER. The remote control enters the learning mode. ERASE and the name of the currently selected control area appears in the display window (4 ) alternately.
Press G SETUP on the remote control using a ballpoint pen or similar object. SETUP appears in the display window (4 ). Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select CLEAR and then press 9 ENTER. The remote control enters the clear mode. CLEAR and L:the three-letter name of the selected control area (for example, L:DVD) appears in the display window (4 ) alternately.
ERASE
3
DVD
CLEAR
3
Clear mode
L:DVD (etc.)
L:DVD
Descriptions
Set the operation mode selector to F SOURCE and then press an input selector button or (3 ). ERASE and the name of the selected control area appears in the display window (4 ) alternately. y
You can also select the desired control area by pressing 5 SELECT l / h repeatedly. If you want to erase the function learned in the AMP or TV control area, set the operation mode selector to F AMP or F TV.
Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the desired clear mode.
Advanced Operation
(L:Three-digit name of the selected control area) Clears all learned functions the respective control area. You can change the control area to be cleared by pressing the desired input selector button or (3 ) or 5 SELECT l / h repeatedly. Sets all learned functions for controlling the amplifier functions to the initial factory settings. Set the operation mode selector to F AMP to select this clear mode. Clears all learned functions for TV control area. Set the operation mode selector to F TV to select this clear mode. Clears all learned functions. (M:Name of the selected macro button) Clears the macro programmed for the selected macro button (see page 108). The assigned macro to the selected macro button reverts to the initial factory macro. Press the desired macro button if you want to change the macro button you want to clear the programmed functions of. Clears all programmed macros. The assigned macro to the selected macro button reverts to the initial factory macro. Set all the name of the control areas to the default settings. Set all settings of the remote control to the initial factory settings.
4 5
Press 9 ENTER. E-KEY appears in the display window (4 ). Press and hold the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. If clearing is successful, ERASE and OK appears in the display window (4 ).
L:AMP
L:TV
L:ALL M:DVD (etc.)
ERASE
y
OK
If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 3. Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes).
M:ALL
Notes
NG appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. ERROR appears in the display window (4 ) if you press more than one button simultaneously.
RNAME FCTRY
Press and hold 9 ENTER for about 3 seconds. When the clearing is successful, OK appears in the display window (4 ).
109 En
Simplified remote control

Use the supplied simplified remote control to make basic controls of this unit.
STANDBY Sets the selected zone to the standby mode. P. 39 SYSTEM MEMORY Save or recall the system settings. P. 96
STANDBY
POWER
POWER Turn on the power. P. 39
SYSTEM MEMORY 1 2 3 4
INPUT
INPUTl / h Select the input source. P. 50

VOLUME
PRESET +/ Recall the preset network/USB contents. P. 70
INT SOURCE PRESET
VOLUME +/ Adjust the volume level. P. 50
s(stop) / p(play) / b(skip backward) / a(skip forward) Control playback of the iPod or Network/USB contents. P. 64, 67
MUTE
MUTE Mutes the audio output. P. 52

Remove the insulation sheet before using the remote control.
Note
When you select NET/USB as the input source, this unit activates the last selected sub input source (see page 67).
Setting the controlling zone of the simplified remote control

Use this feature to set the controlling zone (see page 116) and remote control ID (see page 119) of the simplified remote control. Setting the remote control ID Press and hold b on the simplified remote control and then 1 or 2 for 3 seconds to select the desired remote control ID. ID1: Press and hold b and 1. ID2: Press and hold b and 2. Setting the controlling zone Press and hold a on the simplified remote control and then 1, 2, 3, or 4 to select the desired zone. Main zone: Press and hold a and then press 1. Zone 2: Press and hold a and 2. Zone 3: Press and hold a and 3. Zone 4: Press and hold a and 4.
Replacing the battery in the simplified remote control

Change the battery when the operation range of the simplified remote control decreases.
Use a straight pin to remove the cover.
Replace the battery with a new CR2025 battery.
Close the cover.
Notes
Insert the battery according to the polarity markings (+ and ). If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the simplified remote control to prevent an explosion or acid leak. If a battery starts leaking, dispose of it immediately. Be careful not to let the leaking battery acid touch your skin or clothing. Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean. Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.
110 En
Using multi-zone configuration

This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio/video system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone, second zone (Zone 2), third zone (Zone 3), and forth zone (Zone 4). You can control this unit from the second, third, or forth zone using the supplied remote control.
Step1: Planning the multi-zone system

This unit can control the audio and video system in the main zone and up to 3 optional zone (Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4), and you can use the internal amplifiers or external amplifiers in Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4. The multi-zone system configuration differs depending on your requirements and equipment. Before connecting the speakers and/or external amplifiers for the multi-zone configuration, plan the total design of your multi-zone system. When you plan the system, consider the following points: 1. Do you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit or external amplifiers? 2. How many zones do you want to use this unit for? 3. How many channels do you want to use in the main zone? 4. If you use the internal amplifiers for the other zones, you cannot use some channels in the main zone in some cases. 5. How many speakers do you have? 6. Do you want to use the visual sources other than the main zone? y
Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center for the planning and setup of the multi-zone system that best meet your requirements.
Step 1: Planning the multi-zone system

First, plan the total multi-zone system with this unit carefully. P. 111
Step 2: Connecting the speakers and/ or external amplifiers

Wire cables between rooms and connect the component and speakers to this unit. P. 112
Step 3: Set the zone parameters

Once you have finished the connections, turn on this unit and then set the parameters in Multi Zone menu (see page 91). Use Zone SP Assign to designate the speaker terminals on this unit to each zone. P. 116 Use Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set, or Zone4 Set parameters to set the volume settings and other functions in each zone. P. 91
Pre-amplifier mode If you want use the external amplifiers for the all channels in the main zone, you can use all the speaker terminals on this unit for Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4 (Pre-amplifier mode). Set PREAMP MODE to ON in the advanced setup (see page 120). In the following instruction, following system configuration is the example. When you use this system configuration, you can enjoy 7.2-channel playback in the main zone and 2-channel playback in the optional two zones. You can also enjoy 5.2-channel playback in the main zone and 2-channel playback in the optional three zones.
This unit
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
ON
Advanced Operation
PURE DIRECT
ON/OFF
OFF
INPUT
STRAIGHT
TUNING MODE
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING EDIT
PROGRAM
MENU
VOLUME
EFFECT
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO
ZONE ON/OFF
TONE CONTROL
MULTI ZONE
PUSH ENTER
YPAO
S VIDEO
PHONES
OPTIMIZER MIC
VIDEO AUX
HDMI IN
USB
Main zone
Zone 2
Zone 4
Zone 3
Speakers you can use simultaneously Speakers you can use alternately. If you turn on Zone 4, the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sounds.
111 En
Step2: Connecting the speakers, external amplifiers, and/or other components

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: An infrared signal receiver in Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4. An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4 to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example). An amplifier and speakers for Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4. A video monitor for the second room.
Using the internal amplifier of this unit

Important safety notice The speaker terminals of this amplifier should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owners manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your amplifier. To make the system of the example, connect the speakers in the main zone and other zones as follows:
Right speaker terminals
R
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
You can assign the following speaker terminals to Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4 freely.
SPEAKERS
Left speaker terminals

+
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
RS-2
TAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
Zone 4
R
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
+
L R
Zone 3 Main zone surround Main zone surround back Zone 2 Main zone front Main zone center
L E
SURROUND
SURROUND
TRI O
SURROUND
2
1 +12v 15mA
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP

B FRONT B/ ZONE
B FRONT B/ ZONE
REM
IN
4
D
EXTRA SP
EXTRA SP
FRONT B /ZONE
A
FRONT A
A
1 OUT
FRONT B /ZONE EXTRA SP
EXTRA SP
FRONT A
6
FRONT A IN 2
SPEAKERS USB NETWORK HDMI SPEAKERS
FRONT A
CENTER
7
IN1 IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
IN4
DVR PR
OUT 1
OUT 2
BD/HD DVD MONITOR OUT
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y BD/ HD DVD PB PR
R
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
1 DVD
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
B
C
TRIGGER OUT
L
DVR
1 DVD
5 VCR
4 DVR
AUDIO IN
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
D
SURROUND
R R
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP 2
L
DVR
REMOTE
R
4
R
FRONT B /ZONE
EXTRA SP
1 OUT
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
FRONT A
IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
112 En
Using external amplifiers

When you use the external amplifiers in the Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4, connect the external amplifiers to the ZONE OUT jacks of this unit with the analog audio cables. Notes
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room when Zone2 Volume, Zone3 Volume, or Zone4 Volume are set to Fixed (see page 91).
This unit
IN1
IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
IN4
DVR PR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/ HD DVD Y PB PR
R
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
1 DVD
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
B
C
TRIGGER OUT
L
DVR
1 DVD
5 VCR
4 DVR
AUDIO IN
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
D
SURROUND
R R
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP 2
L
DVR
REMOTE
R
4
R
FRONT B /ZONE
EXTRA SP
1 OUT
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
FRONT A
IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE OUT
Audio in
Audio in
Audio in
Other amplifier
Other amplifier
Other amplifier
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Compatible audio signals in the Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4 When you connect the external amplifiers in Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4 to the ZONE OUT jacks on this unit, this unit can transmit the analog audio signals only. In this setting, this unit cannot play back the digital audio sources input at the DIGITAL IN jacks and HDMI IN jacks in Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4. y
When this unit is in the party mode (see page 118), this unit can output the audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks or DIGITAL IN jacks at the ZONE OUT jacks.
Advanced Operation
Using the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack

When you connect an external amplifier in Zone 2 to the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack, you can play back the digital and analog audio sources in Zone 2. Audio signal flow for Zone 2
IN1
IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
IN4
DVR PR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/ HD DVD Y PB PR
R
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
1 DVD
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
DIGITAL OUT
B
C
TRIGGER OUT
L
DVR
1 DVD
5 VCR
4 DVR
AUDIO IN
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
D
SURROUND
R R
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP 2
L
DVR
ZONE COAXIAL
Input
DIGITAL IN COAXIAL
Output
ZONE (COAXIAL)
REMOTE
R
4
R
FRONT B /ZONE
EXTRA SP
1 OUT
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
FRONT A
IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
Coaxial in
DIGITAL IN OPTICAL
AUDIO IN
ZONE OUT
Notes
Even if you set Zone2 Volume to Variable (see page 91), the volume control on this unit does not function to the output level of the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack. When this unit plays back the copy-protected audio files, this unit does not output any audio signals at the ZONE DIGITAL OUT jack.
113 En
Connecting Zone video monitor

Connect the video monitor(s) in Zone 2 to the ZONE OUT VIDEO and/or ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. If you connect the multiple zone video monitors to ZONE OUT VIDEO and/or ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, the video monitors play back the same source simultaneously.
This unit
VIDEO
ZONE OUT
Y
+
L
ZONE REAR PRESENCE /ZONE COAXIAL CD-R FRONT PRESENCE /ZONE
COMPONENT VIDEO PB
PR
IN1
IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
IN4
DVR PR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/ HD DVD Y PB PR
R
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
1 DVD
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
DVD
B
C
TRIGGER OUT
L
DVR
1 DVD
5 VCR
4 DVR
AUDIO IN
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
D
SURROUND
R R
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP 2
L
DVR
REMOTE
R
4
R
FRONT B /ZONE
EXTRA SP
1 OUT
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
FRONT A
IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
Source component
Video in
Video in
PB
PR
Component in
Zone monitor
Zone monitor
Zone monitor
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Video signal up-conversion to the zone component video signals
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
Note
Low-quality video signals input at the VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks may not be output at the ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks correctly.
114 En
Using REMOTE IN/OUT and TRIGGER OUT jacks for Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4
You can use the REMOTE IN/OUT and TRIGGER OUT jacks on this unit for Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 as well as the main zone. Refer to Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks and Using the TRIGGER OUT jacks on page 36 for more information. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks This unit is equipped with two REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks. You can use the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks to control this unit or other component from Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4. The following diagram shows an example of the connections.
This unit
IN1
IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
IN4
DVR PR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/ HD DVD Y PB PR
R
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
1 DVD
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
Remote control signal out
B
C
TRIGGER OUT
L
DVR
1 DVD
5 VCR
4 DVR
AUDIO IN
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
D
SURROUND
R R
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP 2
L
DVR
REMOTE
R
4
R
FRONT B /ZONE
EXTRA SP
1 OUT
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
FRONT A
IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
External amplifier Remote control signal in

REMOTE
IN 1 OUT
DVD player (etc.)
Remote control Zone 2
IN 2
CD player (etc.)
Remote control signal in
OUT
Remote control Remote control signal out Infrared signal receiver Zone 3
y
Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six Yamaha components can be connected as shown.
Advanced Operation
REMOTE IN
REMOTE OUT IN
REMOTE OUT IN
REMOTE OUT
Infrared signal receiver
This unit
Yamaha component
Yamaha component
TRIGGER OUT jacks This unit is equipped with two TRIGGER OUT jacks. You can turn on and off the component corresponding to the selection of the input source of the desired zone or turning on and off the desired zone. Use Trigger Output in Manual Setup to set the functions of the TRIGGER OUT jacks (see page 94).
This unit
IN1
IN2
DVD VIDEO Y
IN3
CBL/SAT
IN4
DVR PR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/ HD DVD Y PB PR
R
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO PB
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
REAR PRESENCE /ZONE
B
C
TRIGGER OUT
L
DVR
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
1 DVD
2 DTV 3 CBL/SAT
4 DVR
5 VCR
4 DVR
5 VCR
CD-R
OPTICAL MD/TAPE
1
DVD
Trigger in
D
SURROUND
R R
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK/ BI-AMP 2
L
DVR
REMOTE
R
4
R
FRONT B /ZONE
EXTRA SP
1 OUT
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
6
FRONT A
FRONT A
IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC IN
DVD
DTV COAXIAL
8
DIGITAL IN
Power amplifier (etc.)

TRIGGER OUT
1
Trigger in Zone 2 (etc.) Projector (etc.) in the main zone
115 En
Step3: Setting the zone parameter

After the connection, turn on this unit and then set the assignment of the speaker terminals and other zone parameters.
Assigning the zone speakers

Use Zone SP Assign to set the zone that each speaker terminal are used for.
PREAMP MODE When PREAMP MODE in the advanced setup is set to ON (see page 120), you can assign all the speaker terminals of this unit to Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4. The audio signals for the main zone are only output at the PRE OUT jacks.
1 2 3
Press I MENU on the remote control. The top GUI menu appears in the video monitor. Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select Manual Setup and then 9 h. Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select Multi Zone and then 9 h. Multi Zone menu appears in the GUI screen. Press9 k / n repeatedly to select Zone SP Assign and then press 9 h. Following display appears in the GUI screen.
Once you have finished the settings of all the speaker terminals, press 9 ENTER to confirm the setting and exit from the Zone SP Assign screen. Set other zone parameters appropriately. See pages 91 and 92 for details. Once you have finished the settings of the zone parameters, press I MENU to exit the GUI menu.
7 8
Controlling Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4

You can select the zone you want to control by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.
Basic operation
Front panel operations
M 2 3 4
Speaker B Zone SP Assign Party Mode Set Zone2 Set
F.PRNS EXTRA FRONT CENTER SUR. S.BACK R.PRNS
1
/
Zone: / SP terminal:
Press K ZONE 2, K ZONE 3, or K ZONE 4 on the front panel to individually turn on or off Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4. Press K ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. Each time you press K ZONE CONTROLS, the front panel display changes as shown below, and the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for approximately 10 seconds. However, no indicator flashes when the main zone is selected.
ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4
Exit: ENTER
2 5
Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the desired speaker terminals and then 9 l / h repeatedly to select the desired zone you want to use the speaker connected to the selected speaker terminals. When PREAMP MODE in the advanced setup is set to OFF (see page 120), FRONT, CENTER, SUR. and S.BACK are fixed to M (the main zone). To make the system of the example (see page 111), set Zone SP Assign as follows:
M 2 3 4 F.PRNS EXTRA FRONT CENTER SUR. S.BACK R.PRNS
Zone indications M: Main zone 2: Zone 2 3: Zone 3 4: Zone 4
No indicator flashes when the main zone is selected.
ZONE2 Controls the Zone 2 functions. ZONE3 Controls the Zone 3 functions. ZONE4 Controls the Zone 4 functions. y
You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press K ZONE CONTROLS again. The initial setting is ZONE2 when Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 are turned on.
Speaker terminal indications F.PRNS: FRONT PRESENCE speaker terminals EXTRA: EXTRA SP speaker terminals FRONT: FRONT A speaker terminals CENTER: CENTER speaker terminals SUR.: SURROUND speaker terminals S.BACK: SUR.BACK speaker terminals R.PRNS: REAR PRESENCE speaker terminals
116 En
Perform the operations in the selected zone. For further operations, refer to the following pages:
Descriptions Selecting the input source Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
Page
Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 operation mode.
Selecting the input source Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4

Rotate the D INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to F AMP and then press one of the input selector buttons (3 )) to select the input source of the selected zone. Select DOCK as the input source to use the iPod features in the selected zone. For details about the iPod operations, see Using iPod on page 64. Select NET/USB as the input source to use the network/USB operations features in the selected zone. For details about the iPod operations, see Using Network/USB features on page 66. Notes
The selected input sources are shared across all zones. If you set the recording source other than SOURCE (see page 62), the input source of Zone 2 is fixed to the source you set as the recording source.
117 117 118
y
To turn off the desired zone, press K ZONE 2, K ZONE 3, or K ZONE 4 again.
Remote control operations
Press H ZONE repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. MAIN, ZONE 2, ZONE 3, or ZONE 4 indicator appears in the display window (4 ) on the remote control.
ZONE 2
(Zone 2)
ZONE 3
(Zone 3)
ZONE 4
(Zone 4)
MAIN
(Main zone)
Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4

Rotate E VOLUME on the front panel (or press J VOLUME +/) to adjust the volume level of the selected zone. y
Press L MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to the selected zone.
2 3
Press E POWER to turn on the selected zone. Perform the operations in the selected zone. For further operations, refer to the following pages:
Descriptions Selecting the input source Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
Page
Note Advanced Operation

When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3, J VOLUME +/ can be used only when Zone2 Volume, Zone3 Volume, or Zone4 Volume is set to Variable in Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set, or Zone4 Set (see page 91).
117 117 118
Setting the sleep timer for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4

Use this feature to turn off the desired zone to the standby mode after a contain amount of time. Set the operation mode selector to F AMP on the remote control and then press C SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press C SLEEP, the sleep timer setting changes as shown below.
120min. OFF 30min. 90min. 60min.
y
To turn off the desired zone, press D STANDBY.
117 En
Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 operation mode.
Using the party mode

Use this feature to play the main zone sources in the other zones simultaneously. This feature is useful to play back a back ground music in multiple zone in a home party.
Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
1 2
Press M TONE CONTROL on the front panel.

MAIN ZONE
MASTER
ON
PURE DIRECT
ON/OFF
OFF
INPUT
STRAIGHT
TUNING MODE
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING EDIT
PROGRAM
MENU
VOLUME
EFFECT
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO
Press I PROGRAM repeatedly to select the highfrequency response (TREBLE), the low-frequency response (BASS). Rotate I PROGRAM to adjust the high-frequency response (BASS). Control range: 10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
ZONE ON/OFF
TONE CONTROL
MULTI ZONE
PUSH ENTER
YPAO
S VIDEO
PHONES
OPTIMIZER MIC
VIDEO AUX
HDMI IN
USB
1 2 4 3
Using the Zone OSD

You can browse and select the iPod or network/USB contents by using the Zone OSD.
1 2 3
Set the operation mode selector to F SOURCE and then press the desired input selector button (3 ). Press K DISPLAY on the remote control to turn on the Zone OSD. Press 9 k / n / l / h and 9 ENTER repeatedly to navigate the menu on the Zone OSD.
TOP PC/MCX NET RADIO USB > > >
1,2,3 In the party mode, this unit distributes the same sources to the zones which join the party mode. 4 You can also operate the specific zone separately when this unit is in the party mode. Turning on the party mode
Notes
The OSD menu appears in English even if you set LANGUAGE to JAPANESE or RUSSIAN (see page 120). There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores _. You can set the time for which the Zone OSD is displayed in the Zone video monitor by using On Screen in Manual Setup (see page 90).
Press C PARTY on the remote control to turn on the party mode. PARTY MODE ON appears in the front panel display and then the main zone and the zones which join the party mode are turned on. Turning off the party mode Press C PARTY again to turn off the party mode. PARTY MODE OFF appears in the front panel display and then the main zone and the zones that joins the party mode are turned off. y
When this unit is in the party mode, the audio signals that is input at the HDMI IN jacks or DIGITAL IN jacks are output at the ZONE OUT jacks.
y
Short message displays are also appears in the Zone video monitor. Use Zone OSD in Manual Setup to select that this unit displays the operational information of all zones or Zone 2 only (see page 92). You can display the status of the selected zone. Set the operation mode selector to F AMP and then press K DISPLAY.
TOP PC/MCX NET RADIO USB > > >
Notes
If you select MULTI CH as the input source, this unit does not output any sounds when this unit is in the party mode. When you change the input source of the zone that joins the party mode, the input source of the main zone also changes same as the operated zone. When this unit is in the party mode, no signals are not output at the OUT (REC) jacks.
Selecting the zones joining the party mode You can select the zone that joins the party mode by using the Party Mode Set parameters. If a zone does not join the party mode, you can play back a source in the zone independently from the main zone. See page 91 for details.
118 En
Advanced setup
Advanced setup
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
Note
We recommend setting the parameter to ON in most cases.
Wake on RS-232C access
RS-232C STANDBY
Notes
The settings you make are reflected next time you press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see page 39). Only B MASTER ON/OFF and I PROGRAM are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode. Choice
YES NO
Functions
Select this setting to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C interface. Select this setting to set this unit not to transmit data via the RS-232C interface.
Using the advanced setup menu

1
Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Press and hold I PROGRAM and then press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.
Press and hold I PROGRAM until ADVANCED SETUP appears in the front panel display.
Network standby
NET STANDBY
Use this feature to select whether this unit accepts the commands via LAN network when this unit is in the standby mode (see page 101). Choice
YES NO
Functions
Accepts the operations via LAN network when this unit is in the standby mode. Does not accept the operations via LAN network when this unit is in the standby mode.
Note
If you set NET STANDBY to YES, the amount of power consumption in the standby mode is increased.
Remote control ID setting
REMOTE CON AMP Advanced Operation
Rotate the I PROGRAM to select the parameter you want to adjust.

The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display.
Use this feature to set the remote control ID of this unit for remote control recognition. Choice
ID1
Descriptions
Select this setting when the ID of the remote control is set to ID1. Select this setting when the ID of the remote control is set to ID2.
4 5
Push I PROGRAM repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. Press B MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit.
ID2
Setting remote control ID

Use this feature to set the remote control ID. This feature is useful when you control multiple Yamaha AV receiver or amplifier with using the remote control.
Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.

Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choice
8MIN 6MIN
Press G ID repeatedly using a ballpoint pen or similar object on the remote control to select the desired remote control ID.
Each time you press G ID, the remote control ID indicator changes as shown below.
Descriptions
Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to 8 . The impedance of each speaker must be 8 or higher. Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to 6 . The impedance of each speaker must be 6 or higher.
ID1
ID
ID2
y
To set the remote control ID of the simplified remote control, see page 110 for details.
Remote sensor
REMOTE SENSOR
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signal-receiving capability of the remote control sensor on the front panel of this unit. Choice
ON OFF
Descriptions
Select this setting if you want to activate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor. Select this setting if you want to deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor.
119 En
Advanced setup
See page 119 for the operation of the advanced setup.
Notes FAN MODE

Use Initialize in the sound field program menu to initialize the parameters of the desired program (see page 81). When the network settings are reset, DHCP in Network is automatically set to On (see page 92) and the registered client ID of this unit on your Yamaha MCX2000 is cleared (see page 68).
Cooling fan operation mode

Choice
AUTO CONT.
Use this feature to set the operation of the cooling fan of this unit. Descriptions
Select this setting to set the fan to operate automatically according to the temperature of this unit. Select this setting to set the fan to activate continuously regardless of the temperature of this unit.
MAC address filter
MAC FILTER
Use this feature to filter the access to this unit via LAN to control this unit by the MAC address of the accessing PC (see page 101). Choice Descriptions
Only allows to accept the access from the PC whose MAC address is registered to this unit. Allows to accept the access from any PC.
Bi-amplifier mode
Choice
ON OFF
BI-AMP
Descriptions
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier function.
ON OFF
Select this setting if you want to activate the bi-amplifier function. Select this setting if you want to deactivate the biamplifier function.
y
You can register the MAC address that is allowed to access when MAC FILTER is set to ON by using the Web browser (see page 101).
TV format
TV FORMAT
Note
When BI-AMP is set to ON, the SUR.BACK/BI-AMP terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in that the SUR.BACK/BI-AMP terminals are already used for the bi-amplifier connection (see page 27).
Use this feature to set the color encoding format of your television. Choices: NTSC, PAL Initial setting: [General and Korea models]: NTSC [Other models]: PAL
Pre-amplifier mode PREAMP MODE

Use this feature to select whether you use this unit as the pre-amplifier in the main zone and use all the internal amplifiers for the other zones. Choice
ON
Note
This setting is applied to the video monitor in the main zone, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4.
Descriptions
Select this setting when you use this unit as the preamplifier in the main zone. The audio signals for the main zone are only output at the PRE OUT jacks of this unit. You can assign all speaker terminals for the other zones. Select this setting to use the internal amplifiers of this unit for the main zone, Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4.
HDMI monitor check
MONITOR CHECK
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check function of this unit. Choice
YES
Descriptions
This unit receives the information of the available video signal resolutions from the video monitor connected via HDMI and you can only select the resolutions supported by the video monitor in HDMI Resolution (see page 90). You can select any resolution in HDMI Resolution.
OFF
Recovery and backup of the system settings

RECOV./BACKUP
Use this feature to save and restore the settings of this unit. Choice
RECOVERY BACKUP CANCEL SKIP
Select
Restoring the saved setting of this unit. Saves the current settings of this unit. Cancels the recovery or backup of the settings of this unit.
Language
LANGUAGE
Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the GUI (graphical user interface) menu, OSD display in the zone monitor and the messages that appear in the front panel display. Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese), FRENCH (French), GERMAN (German), SPANISH (Spanish), RUSSIAN (Russian)
Notes
This unit does not save the preset network/USB items, and system memory settings. If no settings are saved, you cannot select RECOVERY.
Note
You can also select the language setting by using GUI menu. See page 95 for details.
Parameter initialization INITIALIZE

Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. You can select the category of parameters to be initialized. Choice
DSP PARAM VIDEO NETWORK ALL CANCEL
LANGUAGE
RUSSIAN JAPANESE Other languages
GUI menu
Front panel display
Zone OSD
Descriptions
Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of the sound field parameters (see page 77). Select this setting except Short Message and On Screen (see page 90). Select this setting except Short Message and On Screen (see page 90). Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of this unit. Select this setting to cancel the initialization procedure.
The selected language is displayed. The selected language is not displayed. The menu items and messages are displayed in English.
120 En
Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 122 Glossary ................................................................................. 128
THX information ................................................................................................... 130 Sound field program information .......................................................................... 131
Parametric equalizer information ......................................... 135 Block diagrams ...................................................................... 136 Specifications ........................................................................ 138 Index ........................................................................................ 140 List of remote control codes ................................................. 144
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
General
Problem
This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on.
Cause
The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. The protection circuitry has been activated.
Remedy
Connect the power cable firmly. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. Set the audio input jack select to Auto. Set the audio input jack select to Auto or Coax/Opt. Select an appropriate input source with the D INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons (3 ) on the remote control). Secure the connections. Turn up the volume. Select the front speakers by pressing G SPEAKER A or G SPEAKER B on the front panel. Press L MUTE or J VOLUME +/ on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. Set Support Audio in Option to DSP-Z11.
See page 39 23
This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). No sound. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Audio input jack select is set to HDMI, Coax/ Opt or Analog. Audio input jack select is set to Analog while the input source component outputs digital audio signals. No appropriate input source has been selected.
30-38 52 52
50
Speaker connections are not secure. The volume is turned down. The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. The sound is muted. Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Support Audio is set to Other and HDMI audio signals are not being played back on this unit. No picture. The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. This unit outputs the video signals are not supported in the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Input selector setting of the video monitor is incorrect. Pure Direct mode is active.
23 51 52 28 94
Set Conversion to On or connect your source components in the same way as you connect your video monitor to this unit. Set the INITIALIZE to VIDEO to reset the video parameters. Set MONITOR CHECK to YES. Set the input source selector setting of the video monitor appropriately. Turn off the Pure Direct mode. Set Pure Direct in Sound to Video On.
89 120 120 89
Non-standard video signals are input. The HDMI OUT jack that the video monitor is connected is not selected. Short message displays in the main zone do not appear in the video monitor. The sound suddenly goes off. Short Message is set to Off. Conversion is set to Off. The signals input at the HDMI input jacks are being output at the HDMI OUT jack. The protection circuitry has been activated because Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. of a short circuit, etc. Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. The sleep timer has turned off this unit. The sound is muted. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. Press L MUTE or J VOLUME +/ on the remote control to resume audio output. Press C HDMI OUT on the remote control repeatedly. Set Short Message to On. Set Conversion to On.
51 90 89
39, 119 52
122 En
Troubleshooting
Problem
Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only.
Cause
Incorrect cable connections. Incorrect settings in Speaker Level.
Remedy
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. Adjust the Speaker Level settings.
See page 23 86
Only the center speaker When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA outputs substantial sound. DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. Center in Speaker Set is set to None. One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 11ch Stereo) has been selected and analog 2-channel source is being input. The sound field programs are turned off. You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Surround in Speaker Set is set to None. This unit is in the STRAIGHT mode and a source which does not contain the surround channel signals is being played back. Bass Out in Speaker Set is set to Front when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Bass Out in Speaker Set is set to SWFR or Front when a 2-channel source is being played. The source does not contain low-frequency signals. No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. Surround in Speaker Set is set to None and Surround Back is automatically set to None. Surround Back in Speaker Set is set to None. The audio input sources cannot be played in the desired digital audio signal format. (Desired input source indicator or decoder indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) A humming sound is heard. The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Audio input jack select is set to Analog. Set Surround and Surround Back to a setting other than None. Set Surround Back to a setting other than None. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. Set the audio input jack select to Auto. Set Center to Small or Large. Try another sound field program if you want to output sound from the center speaker. Press H STRAIGHT to turn them on. Try another sound field program. Set Surround to Small or Large. Press H STRAIGHT on the front panel so that STRAIGHT disappears from the front panel display. Set Bass Out to SWFR or Front & SWFR. Set Bass Out to Front & SWFR.
84 54
No sound is heard from the presence speakers.
60 50 84 60
No sound is heard from the surround speakers.
No sound is heard from the subwoofer.
85 85
84 84 52
Incorrect cable connections. No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal.
Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. Connect the grounding cable of the turntable to the GND terminal on this unit. Connect the turntable to this unit through an MC-head amplifier.
34 34
The volume level is low while a record is being played. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The sound effect cannot be recorded. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. This unit does not operate properly.
The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks of this unit is turned off. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. The source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on this unit. Some components cannot record Dolby Digital or DTS sources. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks on this unit.
Turn on the power of the component.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
31, 34
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks.
34
Memory Guard in Option is set to On.
Set Memory Guard to Off.
94
The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
123 En
Troubleshooting
Problem
CHECK SP WIRES appears in the front panel display. There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. The picture is disturbed. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode.
Cause
Speaker cables are short-circuited.
Remedy
Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
See page 23
This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on.
Remote control
Problem
The remote control does not work or function properly.
Cause
Wrong distance or angle.
Remedy
The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. Reposition this unit.
See page 12
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. The batteries are weak. The batteries do not last long and get quickly exhausted. The operation mode selector is set incorrectly.
Replace all batteries. Using alkaline batteries is strongly recommended. Set the backlight mode to OFF. Set the operation mode selector correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the F AMP position.When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the F SOURCE position. When operating the TV, set it to the F TV position. Set the remote control code correctly using List of remote control codes at the end of this manual. Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using List of remote control codes at the end of this manual.
11 104
The remote control code was not correctly set.
104 104 104 105
The remote control ID of the remote control and this unit do not match. The remote control does not work or function properly. The remote control does not learn new functions. Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Memory capacity is full.
Match the remote control ID of this unit and the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. Replace the batteries. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. Learning is not possible.
11 105
Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions.
109
HDMI
Problem No picture or sound Cause
The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. HDCP authentication failed.
Remedy
Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components. Check that the connected HDMI components support the HDCP copy protection standards.
See page
Network and USB

Problem
The PC server/MCX-2000/ Internet Radio does not function properly.
Cause
The IP address is not set properly.
Remedy
Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON. Alternately, perform manual configuration according to the current operating environment. Connect it properly.
See page 92
The network cable is not connected.
37
124 En
Troubleshooting
Problem
The music in the PC server cannot be played back.
Cause
The PC does not have Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Connect 2.0 installed in it. The music is recorded in a format that cannot be played on this unit. This unit cannot play music formats other than WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV (PCM format). Also note that it cannot play certain music files even if these are recorded in the WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, or WAV format.
Remedy
Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Connect 2.0 in the PC. Play music recorded in a format that this unit is compatible with.
See page
The MusicCAST server cannot be connected.
You are attempting to connect to MCX-1000. The MusicCAST server that can be connected by this unit is MCX-2000. Auto Configuration is not executed.
Use MCX-2000 or the PC server.
Execute Auto Configure. Turn this unit off then on again.
68 69
Disconnected is displayed even when a USB device is present. The Internet Radio cannot be played.
This unit recognized the USB storage device as an illegal device. The firewall of the network device is activated. The Internet Radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number is variable depending on radio station. Connection to the Internet is disconnected.
Check the firewall setting of the network device.
Check the configuration of the network device, and then contact the network connection provider. Place music files and directories in the FAT area. Modify the data structure on your USB device.
The music files and directories in the USB device cannot be viewed.
The music files and directories are placed in locations other than the FAT area. You are attempting to browse directory hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory with more than 500 files. The connected USB device is USB portable audio player. The connected USB device is incorrect. The directory that stores the selected item is changed. The USB device is not connected correctly. The PC or MCX-2000 that stores the selected item is turned off. The selected Internet Radio station is temporary unavailable or out of service.
The USB device cannot be recognized. This unit does not recall the correct item by using numeric buttons (1-8). This unit does not recall the selected item by using numeric buttons (1-8).
Some devices may become easier to recognize when they are inserted before turning this unit on. Connect the USB device that stores the preset item. Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8) again. Connect the correct USB device properly. Turn on the PC or MCX-2000. Try again when the selected Internet Radio is providing the service. Preset other Internet Radio stations.
69 69 70 37 68 69 69 See page 37 37
Status message Please wait (Starting Server) Connect error
Cause
This unit is in the middle of waking up MCX-2000 that has been set to the standby mode. There is a problem with the signal path from your network to this unit.
Remedy
Wait for approximately 20 seconds. Check the connection between this unit and the LAN port on your router or hub. Make sure your router is properly connected and turned on. Also, make sure your modem is properly connected and turned on when you are attempting to listen to Internet Radio.
Disconnected
Your USB storage device or USB portable audio player has been disconnected from the USB port on this unit.
Check the connection between this unit and your USB storage device or USB portable audio player.
The PC server or MCX-2000 previously connected Connect this unit to the available PC server or MCX-2000. to this unit no longer exists. There is a problem with the signal path from your USB storage device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage device or USB portable audio player to the USB port on this unit. Try resetting your USB storage device or USB portable audio player. Try another USB storage device or USB portable audio player. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage device or USB portable audio player to the USB port on this unit. Try resetting your USB storage device or USB portable audio player.
68 39 39
Access error
This unit cannot access your USB storage device or USB portable audio player. There is a problem with the signal path from your USB storage device or USB portable audio player to this unit.
125 En
Troubleshooting
Status message Unable to play
Cause
This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your PC.
Remedy
Make sure Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Connect 2.0 is installed on your PC. Check that the songs currently stored on your PC are playable (MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV). Store some other playable music files (MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV) on your PC.
See page
The network may be overloaded with heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted.
Try preparing a network exclusively for use with this unit to separate it from general network traffic. Acquire the license key of the file. For details, consult with the supplier of the file.
License Unavailable List updated Bookmark ON (Bookmark OFF) Empty Memory! Not found!
This unit cannot find the license key of the file. The list of the contents stored on your PC server or MCX-2000 has been updated. The desired Internet Radio station has been added (removed) to the Bookmarks list. No items are assigned to the selected numeric button. This unit cannot find the assigned item for the selected numeric button.
Assign the desired item to the numeric button. Connect the USB device that stores the preset item. Turn on the PC or MCX-2000. Try again when the selected Internet Radio is providing the service. Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8) again.
70 68 69 70
USB Overloaded
Over current passes through the connected USB device.
Turn off this unit and then disconnect the USB device. If the message appears when you connect the USB device again, this unit may not compatible with the USB device.
iPod
Note
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the video monitor, check the connection to your iPod (see page 36). Status message
Loading...
Cause
This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod.
Remedy
See page
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal on this unit. Try resetting your iPod.
36
Unknown iPod iPod connected
The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. Your iPod is properly stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod.
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
Disconnected
Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal on this unit. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
36
Unable to play
Auto Setup
Before Auto Setup
Error message
Connect MIC! Unplug Phones! No Setup Menu! Memory Guard!
Cause
Optimizer microphone is not connected. Headphones are connected. No check items are selected as the measurement items. Memory Guard is set to On.
Remedy
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug the headphones. Select the desired check item. Set Memory Guard to Off.
See page
43
44 94
126 En
Troubleshooting
During Auto Setup

Error message
E01:No Front SP E02:No Sur. SP E03:No F. PRNS SP E04:SBR SBL
Cause
Front L/R channel signals are not detected. A surround channel signal is not detected. A front presence channel signal is not detected.
Remedy
Check the front L/R speaker connections. Check the surround speaker connections. Check the front presence speaker connections.
See page
23 23 23 23
Only right surround back channel signal is detected. Connect the surround back speaker to the SUR.BACK/BI-AMP (SINGLE) terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. Background noise is too loud. Try running Auto Setup in a quiet environment. Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone.
E05:Noisy
E06:Check Sur. E07:No MIC E08:No R.PRNS SP E09:User Cancel E10:Internal Err.
Surround back speakers are connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the Auto Setup procedure. A rear presence channel signal is not detected. The Auto Setup procedure was cancelled due to user activity. An internal error occurred.
Connect surround speakers when you use surround back speakers. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Check the rear presence speaker connections. Run Auto Setup again. Run Auto Setup again.
23 43 23 42 42
After Auto Setup

Warning message
W1:Out of Phase
Cause
Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive.
Remedy
Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or ). Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. Check the speaker connections. Use speakers of similar quality. Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.
See page
23
W2:Over Distance W3:Level Error

23
42
W4:SP Mismatch
The result of the wiring check of Auto Setup is different from Speaker Set in Manual Setup. Wiring check procedure is skipped.
Use Speaker Set in Manual Setup to adjust the speaker settings manually. Select Wiring in Setup Menu.
84
44
Notes
If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run Auto Setup again. If warning W2 or W3 appears, the adjustment are made, however the adjustments may not be optimal. Depending on the speakers, warning W1 may appears even if the speakers connections are correct. If error E10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified Yamaha service center.
Resetting the system

Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Notes
This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the GUI menu parameters. The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
Press and hold I PROGRAM and then press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. Press and hold I PROGRAM until ADVANCED SETUP appears in the front panel display (see page 119). Rotate I PROGRAM to select INITIALIZE. Press I PROGRAM repeatedly to select ALL. y
Select CANCEL to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. You can initialize the video parameters or sound field program parameters separately. See page 120 for details.
3 4
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position.
Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit.
Press B MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to confirm your selection and turn off this unit.
127 En
Glossary
Glossary
Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: Music mode for music sources, Movie mode for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and Game mode for game sources.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control.
Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the color difference signal because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals.
Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined.
DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a highfrequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.
Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. 96 refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. 24 refers to 24bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
DTS Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with fly-over and fly-around effects.
DTS Express
DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the optional feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which offers high-quality, low bit rate audio optimized for network streaming, and Internet applications. DTS Express is used for the Secondary Audio feature of Blu-ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD. These features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the additional commentaries made by the director of a film) on demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express signals are mixed down with the main audio stream on the player component, and the component sends the mixed audio stream to the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital coaxial, digital optical, or analog connections.
Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.
DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for highdefinition disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: Music mode for music sources, Movie mode for movie sources and Game mode for game sources.
128 En
Glossary
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD.
xvYCC
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, xvYCC expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at http://www.hdmi.org/.
LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a lowfrequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a bit rate lower than that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used among others for mobile telephones, portable audio players and other low-capacity devices requiring high sound quality. In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4 AAC is also used to distribute contents on the Internet, and as such is supported by computers, media servers and many other devices.
Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: Music mode for music sources and Cinema mode for movie sources.
PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for Pulse Code Modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced.
S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired compression method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression methods including the ADPCM method.
129 En
Glossary
THX information
THX Cinema mode

In this mode, THX Loudness Plus is designed around the industry-standard reference mixing level as well as adding other proprietary THX technologies such as Adaptive Decorrelation, Re-EQ, and Timbre Matching to recreate the theatrical experience at home.
THX Music mode

THX Music modes provide the appropriate THX processing to enhance music listening. THX Music applies a dedicated music profile of THX Loudness Plus, designed around the varying mix levels in music sources which are often very different than film or television sources. Additionally, THX Music applies Timbre Matching to the surround speaker channels.
THX Games mode

THX Games mode gives the benefit of THX Loudness Plus, as well as other THX proprietary features which provide the gamer with a more accurate listening experience at lower levels, while maintaining all of the directional cues critical to gameplay.
THX Surround EX
Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home. This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener.
THX Ultra2 Cinema mode

THX Ultra2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds. This mode permits the playback of a non Surround EX/ES encoded 5.1 movie to be played back over a 7.1 system. DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected, if the appropriate flag has been encoded. Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Ultra2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.
THX Ultra2 Music mode

For the playback of multi-channel music the THX Ultra2 Music mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.
THX Ultra2 Games mode THX Ultra2

Before any home theatre component can be THX Ultra2 certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Ultra2 requirements cover every aspect of the product including preamplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain. For the playback of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX Ultra2 Games mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Ultra2 Games mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.
THX Loudness Plus

THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus and THX Select2 Plus Certified receivers. With THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel levels and frequency response. This enables users to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of content.
THX Cinema processing

THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the worldrenowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when THX appears in the front panel display, THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).
130 En
Glossary
Re-Equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theatres using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment.
Sound field program information

Elements of a sound field
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the players instrument.
Adaptive Decorrelation
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channels time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates with only two speakers the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field processor.
BGC (Boundary Gain Compensation)

If your chosen listening room layout (for practical or aesthetic reasons) results in the most of the listeners being close to the rear wall, the resulting bass level can be sufficiently reinforced by the boundary that the overall sound quality becomes boomy. THX Ultra2 receivers and controllers contain the BGC (Boundary Gain Compensation) feature to provide an improved bass balance. Bndry Gain Comp can be selected by setting THX Ultra2 SWFR to Yes in THX Set of Manual Setup.
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field technology combined with various digital audio systems.
ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)

ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and Subwoofer), be sure to go to the THX Set screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround soundfield. ASA is used in three modes; THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Ultra2 Music and THX Ultra2 Games.
CINEMA DSP HD
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
Dialogue normalization
Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby Digital, which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening level so the user does not have to change the volume control between Dolby Digital programs. When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see a brief message in the front panel display which will read Dial Norm X dB (X being a numeric value). The display is showing how the program level relates with THX calibration level. If you want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels, you may wish to adjust the volume. For example, if you see the following message: Dial Norm + 4 dB in the front panel display, to keep the overall output level at THX calibrated loudness, just turn down the volume control by 4 dB. However, unlike a movie theater where the playback loudness is preset, you can choose your preferred volume setting for best enjoyment.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP

Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker.
Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system.
131 En
Glossary
Sound output in each sound field program

Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the table below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program. Note
Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as special sound effects, etc.
L
Front left speaker Center speaker Front right speaker Surround left speaker Speaker from which sound is being output
SR SBL SBR FPL
Surround right speaker Surround back left speaker Surround back right speaker Front presence left speaker
FPR RPL RPR
Front presence right speaker Rear presence left speaker Rear presence right speaker
C R SL
Speaker from which no sound is being output
Speaker settings 11-channel

FPL L C R FPR
Speaker settings 11-channel

FPL L C R FPR
5-channel
5-channel
1
SL RPL SBL SBR SR RPR
7
SL RPL SBL SBR SR
SL
RPR
SR
FPL L C R
FPR
FPL
FPR L C R
2
SL RPL SBL SBR SR
8
SL SR SBL SBR
SL
RPR
SR
RPL
SL
RPR
SR
FPL L C R
FPR
FPL
FPR L C R
3
SL RPL SBL SBR SR
9
SL SR SBL SBR
SL
RPR
SR
RPL
SL
RPR
SR
FPL L C R
FPR
FPL
FPR L C R
4
SL RPL SBL SBR SR
0
SL SR SBL SBR
SL
RPR
SR
RPL
SL
RPR
SR
FPL L C R
FPR
FPL
FPR L C R
5
SL RPL SBL SBR SR
A
SL SR SBL SBR
SL
RPR
SR
RPL
SL
RPR
SR
FPL L C R
FPR
6
SL RPL SBL SBR SR
SL
RPR
SR
132 En
Glossary
*1 q EX / *2 q EX /
q PL x q PL x
/ /
: OFF : ON or discrete 6.1/7.1-channel audio signals are input. HD Input audio source 2-channel (monaural) 2-channel (stereo) 5.1-channel*1 6.1/7.1-channel*2
Program CLASSICAL1
Hall in Munich A Hall in Munich B Hall in Frankfurt Hall in Stuttgart Hall in Vienna Hall in Amsterdam
ON
CLASSICAL2
Hall in USA A Hall in USA B Chamber Church in Tokyo Church in Freiburg Church in Royaumont
LIVE/CLUB
Village Gate Village Vanguard The Bottom Line Cellar Club The Roxy Theatre Warehouse Loft Arena
OFF
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports Music Video Recital/Opera Pavilion Disco Action Game Roleplaying Game
ON
MOVIE
Standard Spectacle Sci-Fi Adventure Drama
OFF
MOVIE
Mono Movie
ON OFF
3 5 7 4
3 6 7 4
3 3 7 4
4 4 7 4 Additional Information
STEREO
2ch Stereo
STEREO
11ch Stereo
MUSIC ENHANCER
11ch Enhancer
SUR.DECODE Surround Decoder

(Pro Logic)

(PLIIx Movie/PLII Movie) (PLIIx Game/PLII Game) (Neo:6 Cinema)

(PLIIx Music/PLII Music) (Neo:6 Music)
A 8 8 A 8 7
0 9 0 0 0 7
9 0 0 0 0 9
0 0 0 0 0 0
THX
Cinema (Pro Logic)
THX
Cinema (PLIIx Movie/PLII Movie/ Neo: 6 Cinema)
THX
Music
THX
Games
STRAIGHT Pure Direct MUSIC ENHANCER

Straight Enhancer
133 En
Glossary
Available parameters for each sound field program

Note
Available sound field parameter may differ depending on the speaker settings.
Sur. Room Size SB. Room Size SB. Init. Delay Sur. Init.Delay Decoder Type Sur. Liveness SB. Liveness Dialogue Lift Room Size Rev. Delay
DSP Level
Rev. Level
Init. Delay
Rev. Time
Liveness
CLASSICAL1
Hall in Munich A Hall in Munich B Hall in Frankfurt Hall in Stuttgart Hall in Vienna Hall in Amsterdam
CLASSICAL2
Hall in USA A Hall in USA B Chamber Church in Tokyo Church in Freiburg Church in Royaumont
LIVE/CLUB
Village Gate Village Vanguard The Bottom Line Cellar Club The Roxy Theatre Warehouse Loft Arena
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports Music Video Recital/Opera Pavilion Disco Action Game Roleplaying Game
MOVIE
Standard Spectacle Sci-Fi Adventure Drama Mono Movie
Decoder Type
Dialogue Lift
Center Level
Surround R Level
Surround L Level
Sur.Back R Level
Sur.Back L Level
R.PRNS R Level
Decoder Parameters
R.PRNS L Level
F.PRNS R Level
F.PRNS L Level
Direct
Level
STEREO
2ch Stereo 11ch Stereo
SUR. DECODE
Surround Decoder
THX
Cinema/Ultra2 Cinema/Surround EX
MUSIC ENHANCER
Straight Enhancer/ 11ch Enhancer
134 En
Parametric equalizer information
Parametric equalizer information

This unit employs Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the Parametric EQ settings (see page 87), to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency characteristics. YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening requirements using a combination of the above three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this units parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each channel. The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1). Figure 1
Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Original frequency characteristic
Frequency
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz.
Figure 2
Gain Frequency characteristic after correction
Gain
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between 20 and +6 dB.
Band 1 Frequency Original frequency characteristic
Band 2
Standing wave
A wave generated when two waves of the same length, frequency and speed but traveling in opposite directions overlap. Standing waves appear to be stationary and simply oscillating in a fixed position without progressing. Under certain conditions, the sound leaving a speaker and the sound reflecting off a wall, etc., in a room resonate. When this happens, it has a major effect on the frequency response in the room, and depending on the listening position sounds of specific frequencies may sound loud or inversely may be hard to hear. As a result, this hampers accurate reproduction of the sound source. This unit is equipped with a parametric equalizer to reduce the effect of standing waves. The equalizers settings can be optimized through automatic measurements. Even more accurate settings can be made by taking measurements at other positions.
Q factor
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10.
135 En
Block diagrams
Block diagrams
Audio section
COAXIAL DIGITAL IN CD HD/BD DVD DVD DTV OPTICAL DIGITAL IN MD /TAPE DVD CBL/SAT DVR HDMI IN IN (Front) IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 Main Audio DAC Volume Switch HDMI Selector HDMI Rx HDMI HDMI Tx HDMI Tx OUT 1 OUT 2 HEAD PHONES PHONES PRE OUT SUR BACK REAR PRES SURROUND USB USB (Front) USB (Rear) USB Selector NET/USB FRONT FRONT PRES CENTER (Mono) SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT SURR SB/FRONT C, SW AUDIO IN Amp Assign SEL PHONO CD-R CD MD/TAPE TUNER AUDIO IN with Video DVD DTV/LD DVR VCR CBL/SAT V-AUX Source REC Source/REC Selector Switch DOCK VCR DVR MD/TAPE CD-R INPUT Selector REC/Zone Selector Main/Source ZONE OUT Zone Mono REC/Zone Volume Switch Zone ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 REC OUT NET PHONO EQ Multi-ch Main Audio ADC Power Amplifier SPEAKER OUT FRONT Switch(Replay) CENTER (Mono) SURROUND SUR BACK FRONT PRES REAR PRES SUR BACK HDMI OUT DIT REC/Zone Selector INPUT Selector DIR Selector Main Zone HDMI DSP REC OUT (OPTICAL DIGITAL) CD-R ZONE2/REC OUT (COAXIAL DIGITAL) ZONE OUT/DVR
Decoder
Cinema DSP
YPAO, etc.
Zone
NET NET PHY
136 En
Switch
Block diagrams
Video section
HDMI IN IN (Front) IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 Selector Selector HDMI Selector HDMI Rx HDMI HDMI Tx HDMI Tx OUT 1 OUT 2 HDMI OUT
Video I/P Converter
Video Selector
COMPONENT VIDEO IN BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT DVR S E L

INPUT Selector
MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) Video Decoder GUI Processor Video I/P Converter YPbPr Video Encoder S E L MONITOR OUT 1 MONITOR OUT 2 ZONE2 OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) ZONE2 OUT
S VIDEO IN V-AUX DVD DTV CBL/SAT DVR VCR DOCK Source/REC Selector Y/C INPUT Selector REC/Zone REC/Zone Selector Source/Main Video Decoder Video Encoder S E L
MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO) MONITOR OUT
REC OUT (S VIDEO) DVR VCR
VIDEO IN V-AUX DVD DTV CBL/SAT DVR VCR DOCK Source/REC Selector CVBS INPUT Selector REC/Zone REC/Zone Selector Zone OSD Source/Main S E L S E L
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) MONITOR OUT ZONE2 OUT (VIDEO) ZONE2 OUT 1
ZONE2 OUT 2
REC OUT (VIDEO) DVR VCR
137 En
Specifications
Specifications
AUDIO SECTION
Minimum RMS Output Power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ) Front, Center, Surround, Surround back ............................................... 140 W Front presence, Rear presence ................................................................. 50 W Dynamic Power (IHF) [Asia, General, China and Korea models] Front L/R 8/6/4/2 ........................................................ 185/230/290/385 W Maximum Useful Output power (JEITA) (1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ) [Asia, General, China and Korea models] Front, Center, Surround, Surround back ............................................... 200 W Front presence, Rear presence ................................................................. 75 W Maximum Output Power (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ) [U.K. and Europe models] Front, Center, Surround, Surround back ............................................... 240 W Front presence, Rear presence ................................................................. 90 W Dynamic Headroom 8 ......................................................................................................... 1.2 dB IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ......................................................................... 155 W Damping Factor (IHF) Front L/R 1 kHz, 8 ................................................................... 150 or more Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................................... 3.5 mV/47 k CD, etc. ................................................................................... 200 mV/47 k MULTI CH INPUT ................................................................. 200 mV/47 k Maximum Input Voltage PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) .................................................. 60 mV or more CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ..................................................... 2.4 V or more Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT ........................................................................... 200 mV/900 PRE OUT .................................................................................... 1.0 V/500 SUBWOOFER ............................................................................ 2.0 V/500 ZONE OUT ................................................................................ 1.0 V/1.4 k Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 ) .................................................. 150 mV/100 Frequency Response CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct ............................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/3 dB RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ............................................................ 0 0.5 dB Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to AUDIO OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ..................... 0.02% or less CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W, 8 ) ................. 0.02% or less Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R .................................................. 81 dB or more CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ............................................. 100 dB or more Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R .................................................................................... 70 V or less Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ................................. 70 dB/60 dB or more CD, etc. (5.1 k shortened) to Front L/R ..................... 70 dB/60 dB or more Tone Control (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer) BASS Boost/Cut .......................................................................... 6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................................. 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................................. 6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ............................................................ 3.5 kHz Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................................... 10 dB/100 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................................. 380 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................................ 10 dB/10 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ............................................................ 1.6 kHz Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small) ................ 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .......................................................................... 24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
Video Format [MONITOR OUT] (Wall Paper) [Korea and General models] ......................................................... NTSC/PAL [U.K., Europe, China and Asia models] ....................................... PAL/NTSC Video Format (Video Conversion) .................................................... NTSC/PAL Signal Level Composite ................................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 S-video .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 (Y), 0.286 or 0.3 Vp-p/75 (C) Component ..................................... 1 Vp-p/75 (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 (PB/PR) Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) ................... 1.5 Vp-p or more Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off) ........................... 70 dB or more Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT] Component (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, 3 dB Video Format [ZONE OUT] (Gray Back) [Korea and General models] ......................................................... NTSC/PAL [U.K., Europe, China and Asia models] ....................................... PAL/NTSC Video signal type [ZONE COMPONENT OUT] (Video conversion) ............................................................................ NTSC/PAL
GENERAL
Power Supply [General and Asia models] ................ AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] ...................................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] ...................................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz Power Consumption ................................................................. 800 W/1000 VA Standby Power Consumption ......................................................... 0.1 W or less Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] .......................... 1500 W AC Outlets [Asia, General and China models] .......................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [U.K. model] ........................................................ 1 (100 W/0.4 A maximum) [Europe model] ........................................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum) Dimensions (W x H x D) .................................................. 435 x 210 x 497 mm (17-1/8 x 8-1/4 x 19-9/16 in) Weight .............................................................................. 34.0 kg (74 lbs 15 oz)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
138 En
Specifications
HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals
Audio signal types 2ch Linear PCM Multi-ch Linear PCM DSD Bitstream Bitstream (High definition audio) Audio signal formats 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/ 20/24 bit 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/ 20/24 bit 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit Dolby Digital, DTS Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Compatible media CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. DVD-Audio, etc. SACD, etc. DVD-Video, etc. Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
Compatibility with Deep Color and xvYCC video signals This unit accepts 30 or 36 bit Deep Color video signals. Set HDMI Resolution to Through or HDMI Processing to Off (see page 90) to output the Deep Color and xvYCC video signals from the HDMI OUT jacks without any processing (see page 90). If you set HDMI Processing to Onand HDMI Resolution to other than Through, this unit converts the Deep Color and xvYCC video signals to the video signals with normal color depth and color space. If the video monitor is not compatible with the Deep Color or xvYCC video signals, the video source may not play back correctly. Default input assignment of HDMI input jacks
HDMI input jack IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 Front HDMI IN jack Assigned input source BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT DVR V-AUX
y
If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the following connections: multi-channel analog audio input (see page 35) DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL) Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.
Notes
When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details. This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.
The HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standards: HDMI Version 1.3a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.3a) licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC. HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.
Video signals This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: Video signal format 480i/60 Hz 576i/50 Hz 480p/60 Hz 576p/50 Hz 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
139 En
Index
Index
Numerics
11.1-channel speaker connection ..................... 23 11.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 21 11.2-channel speaker connection ..................... 23 11.2-channel speaker layout ............................ 21 11ch Enhancer .................................................. 59 11ch Stereo ...................................................... 59 2ch Stereo ........................................................ 59 5.1-channel speaker connection ....................... 24 5.1-channel speaker layout .............................. 22 5.2-channel speaker connection ....................... 24 5.2-channel speaker layout .............................. 22 7.1-channel speaker connection ....................... 24 7.1-channel speaker layout .............................. 22 7.2-channel speaker connection ....................... 24 7.2-channel speaker layout .............................. 22 Blu-ray Disc player connection ........................31 Bndry Gain Comp ............................................84 Bookmarks, network menu ..............................66 Boundary gain compensation ...........................84 Dialogue Lift, Sound field parameter .............. 77 Digital audio jacks ........................................... 20 DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks ............................. 28 DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks .............................. 28 Dimension ........................................................ 81 Dimmer ............................................................ 93 Dimmer ............................................................ 93 Dipole speaker using ........................................ 21 Direct ............................................................... 80 Disco ................................................................ 58 Display window, remote control ...................... 12 DNS Server (P) ................................................ 92 DNS Server (S) ................................................ 92 DOCK terminal ................................................ 20 Drama ............................................................... 58 DSP indicators, Front panel display ................ 40 DSP Level, Sound field parameter .................. 77 DVD player connection ................................... 32 DVD recorder connection ................................ 33 Dynamic Range ................................................ 87 Dynamic range ................................................. 87
AC IN ............................................................... 20 AC OUTLET(S) ........................................ 20, 38 Action Game .................................................... 58 Adaptive DRC .................................................. 86 Adaptive DSP effect level ................................ 86 Adaptive DSP Lvl ............................................ 86 Adaptive dynamic range control ...................... 86 Adjusting speaker level .................................... 61 Adjusting tonal quality ..................................... 61 Advanced automatic setup ............................... 46 Advanced setup .............................................. 119 Advanced sound configurations ....................... 72 Adventure ......................................................... 58 AMP, Operation mode selector ....................... 12 Arena ................................................................ 57 Audio and video synchronization .................... 88 Audio cable plugs ............................................ 28 Audio component connection .......................... 34 Audio component jacks ................................... 20 Audio Info. ....................................................... 95 Audio information ............................................ 95 Audio input jack select .................................... 82 Audio input jack selection ............................... 52 AUDIO jacks ................................................... 28 Audio jacks ...................................................... 28 AUDIO SELECT ............................................. 52 Audio Select ............................................... 82, 93 Audio signal flow ............................................. 29 Auto ................................................................. 89 Auto Bypass ..................................................... 88 Auto bypass ...................................................... 88 Auto Setup, troubleshooting .......................... 126 Automatic audio delay adjustment .................. 89
Back ground video ........................................... 83 Background video source playback ................. 51 Basic automatic setup ...................................... 44 Basic, Manual Setup ........................................ 83 Basic, Manual setup ......................................... 83 Bass Cross Over ............................................... 84 Bass cross over ................................................. 84 Bass Out ........................................................... 85 Bass out ............................................................ 85 Battery charge indicator, Front panel display ...................................... 40 BGV ................................................................. 83 BI-AMP ......................................................... 120 bi-amplification connections ............................ 27 Bi-amplifier mode .......................................... 120
Cable plugs .......................................................28 Cellar Club .......................................................57 Center ...............................................................84 Center Image ....................................................81 Center Level .....................................................80 Center speaker ..................................................84 Center Width ....................................................80 Chamber ...........................................................56 Channel Mute ...................................................89 Channel mute ....................................................89 Church in Freiburg ...........................................56 Church in Royaumont ......................................56 Church in Tokyo ...............................................56 Cinema .............................................................73 CINEMA DSP HD mode ................................60 CINEMA DSP indicator, Front panel display .......................................40 CLASSICAL 1 .................................................55 CLASSICAL 2 .................................................56 Component I/P ..................................................90 Component interlace/progressive conversion ....................................................90 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ....................20, 28 COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks ...................20 Configuration ...................................................85 Connecting a DVD recorder .............................33 Connecting a multi-format player ....................35 Connecting a VCR ...........................................33 Connecting an external decoder .......................35 Connecting an iPod universal dock ..................36 Connecting audio components .........................34 Connecting external amplifiers ........................35 Connecting network .........................................37 Connecting power cable ...................................38 Connecting speaker cable .................................27 Connecting subwoofers ....................................25 Connecting the USB memory devices .............37 Connecting to the rear USB ports ....................37 Connection a Blu-ray Disc player ....................31 Connection an HD DVD player .......................31 Connection, DVD player ..................................32 Connection, projector .......................................30 Connection, set-top box ....................................32 Connection, TV monitor ..................................30 Controlling other components, remote control ............................................103 Conversion .......................................................89 Cooling fan operation mode ...........................120
Effect sound level of the sound field parameter ........................ 77 ENHANCER .................................................... 59 ENHANCER indicator, Front panel display ....... 41 ENTERTAIN ................................................... 57 External amplifier connection .......................... 35 External decoder connection ............................ 35
FAN MODE ................................................... 120 Files/Directories, USB menu ........................... 66 Front ................................................................. 84 Front Panel Disp. ............................................. 93 Front panel display .......................................... 40 Front panel display message scroll .................. 93 Front panel display setting ............................... 93 Front panel door ............................................... 12 Front Presence .................................................. 84 Front Presence L Level .................................... 80 Front Presence R Level .................................... 80 Front presence speakers ............................. 26, 84 Front speaker set selection ............................... 51 Front speakers .................................................. 84 Front/rear USB port indicator, Front panel display ...................................... 40
Genres, network menu ..................................... 66 Graphic user interface (GUI) screen ................ 74 Graphical user interface menu ......................... 53 GUI language setting ....................................... 39 GUI menu ........................................................ 53 GUI screen position ......................................... 90
Decoder descriptions ........................................72 Decoder indicators, Front panel display ...........40 Decoder Mode ..................................................94 Decoder parameter descriptions .......................80 Decoder selection .............................................72 Decoder Type ...................................................78 Default audio input jack select .........................93 Default decoder mode ......................................94 Default Gateway ...............................................92 Default gateway ................................................92 DHCP ...............................................................92 DHCP setting ....................................................92
Hall in Amsterdam ........................................... 56 Hall in Frankfurt .............................................. 55 Hall in Munich A ............................................. 55 Hall in Munich B ............................................. 55 Hall in Stuttgart ................................................ 56 Hall in USA A ................................................. 56 Hall in USA B .................................................. 56 Hall in Vienna .................................................. 56 HD Cubic indicator, Front panel display ......... 40 HD DVD player connection ............................ 31 HDMI ............................................................... 28
140 En
Index
HDMI Aspect .................................................. 90 HDMI aspect ratio ........................................... 90 HDMI Auto ...................................................... 88 HDMI automatic lip sync mode ...................... 88 HDMI IN jack select ........................................ 94 HDMI indicator, Front panel display .............. 40 HDMI jack ....................................................... 28 HDMI jacks ..................................................... 20 HDMI monitor check ..................................... 120 HDMI OUT jack select .................................... 94 HDMI Processing ............................................ 90 HDMI Resolution ............................................ 90 HDMI Set ........................................................ 94 HDMI settings ................................................. 94 HDMI video processing ................................... 90 HDMI video signal resolution ......................... 90 HDMI, troubleshooting ................................. 124 Headphone using ............................................. 51 Headphones indicator, Front panel display ......... 40 Help, network menu ........................................ 66 HiFi DSP .......................................................... 55 Hi-fi sound playback ....................................... 61
Locations, network menu .................................66 Loudness Plus ...................................................84 Loudness plus setting .......................................84 Low-frequency effect level ..............................86
I/O Assignment ................................................ 81 ID1/ID2 indicator, remote control ................... 12 Information ...................................................... 93 Information display, remote control ................ 12 Infrared window, remote control ..................... 12 Init. Delay ........................................................ 78 Initial Volume .................................................. 86 Initial volume ................................................... 86 INITIALIZE .................................................. 120 Initialize, Sound field parameter ..................... 81 Input ................................................................. 94 Input channel indicators, Front panel display ...................................... 41 Input output jack select .................................... 94 Input Select ...................................................... 81 Input signal indicators, Front panel display ...................................... 40 Input signal information, GUI menu ............... 95 Input source indicators, Front panel display ...................................... 40 Input/output assignment .................................. 81 Internet Radio using ......................................... 69 Internet Radio, network menu ......................... 66 IP Address ........................................................ 92 IP address ......................................................... 92 iPod .................................................................. 93 iPod charge on the standby mode .................... 93 iPod settings ..................................................... 93 iPod universal dock connection ....................... 36 iPod using ........................................................ 64 iPod, troubleshooting ..................................... 126
MAC Address ...................................................93 MAC address ....................................................93 MACRO .........................................................108 Macro programming, remote control .............107 Main 11ch Stereo .............................................91 Main zone 11-channel stereo ...........................91 Manual ........................................................89, 95 Manual ..............................................................95 Manual audio delay adjustment .......................89 Manual parametric equalizer configuration of each speaker .............................................87 Max Volume .....................................................86 Maximum volume ............................................86 MCX-2000 using ..............................................68 Media Access Control address .........................93 Memory Guard .................................................94 Memory guard ..................................................94 Microphone base ..............................................11 MONITOR CHECK .......................................120 Mono Movie .....................................................59 MOVIE .............................................................58 Multi CH Assign ..............................................83 MULTI CH INPUT jacks .................................20 Multi channel assignment ................................83 Multi Zone, Manual Setup ...............................91 Multi zone, Manual setup .................................91 Multi-channel sources playback with headphones ..........................................60 Multi-format player connection .......................35 Multi-information display, Front panel display .......................................40 Multi-zone configuration ...............................111 Music Video .....................................................57 Muting audio output .........................................52 Muting Type ...............................................86, 92 Muting type ......................................................86
J L
Jacks ................................................................. 28
Neo:6 Cinema ...................................................72 Neo:6 Music .....................................................72 NET/USB, Manual Setup .................................92 NET/USB, Manual setup .................................92 Network ............................................................92 Network connection .........................................37 Network features using USB features using .............................66 Network information ........................................93 Network menu ..................................................66 NETWORK port ..............................................20 Network settings ...............................................92 Network status ..................................................93 Network, troubleshooting ...............................124 New Stations, network menu ...........................66
Parametric EQ .................................................. 87 Parametric equalizer ........................................ 87 Parametric equalizer data copy ........................ 87 Parametric equalizer information .................. 135 Parametric equalizer type select ...................... 87 party mode ..................................................... 118 Party Mode Set ................................................ 91 Party mode settings .......................................... 91 Party mode target zone setting ......................... 91 Pavilion ............................................................ 57 PC server using ................................................ 68 PC/MusicCAST, network feature .................... 66 PEQ Data Copy ............................................... 87 PEQ Select ....................................................... 87 Phase ................................................................ 85 Placing speakers .............................................. 21 Play Style ......................................................... 83 Playback basic procedure ................................ 50 Playback styles ................................................ 83 Playing video sources in the background ........ 51 PLII Game ....................................................... 72 PLII Movie ...................................................... 72 PLII Music ....................................................... 72 PLIIx Game ..................................................... 72 PLIIx Movie .................................................... 72 PLIIx Music ..................................................... 72 Podcasts, network menu .................................. 66 Popular Stations, network menu ...................... 66 Position ............................................................ 90 Power cable connection ................................... 38 PRE AMP indicator, Front panel display ........ 41 PRE OUT jacks ............................................... 20 PREAMP MODE .......................................... 120 Pre-amplifier mode ........................................ 120 Presence speaker indicators, Front panel display ...................................... 41 Presence speaker using .................................... 26 Primary DNS server ......................................... 92 PRO LOGIC .................................................... 72 Program parameters initialization .................... 81 Programming macro operations ..................... 108 Projector connection ........................................ 30 PURE DIRECT ................................................ 61 Pure Direct ....................................................... 89 Pure Direct ....................................................... 89
Q R
Quick automatic setup ..................................... 43
LAN STANDBY ........................................... 119 LAN standby .................................................. 119 LANGUAGE ................................................. 120 Language ....................................................... 120 Language, GUI menu ...................................... 95 Language, GUI menu ...................................... 95 Level ................................................................ 80 LFE Level ........................................................ 86 LIGHT, remote control .................................... 12 Lipsync ............................................................ 88 LIVE/CLUB .................................................... 56 Liveness ........................................................... 79 Loading system settings ................................... 98
On Screen .........................................................90 On-screen display time .....................................90 Operation mode selector, remote control .........12 OPTIMIZER MIC jack ....................................43 Optimizing speaker setting ...............................42 Option, Manual Setup ......................................93 Option, Manual setup .......................................93 Output ...............................................................94
Panorama ..........................................................80 Parameter initialization ..................................120
Rear panel ........................................................ 20 Rear Presence .................................................. 85 Rear Presence L Level ..................................... 80 Rear Presence R Level ..................................... 80 Rear presence speakers .............................. 26, 85 Rear USB port connection ............................... 37 Recital/Opera ................................................... 57 RECOUT indicator, Front panel display ......... 40 REMOTE CON AMP .................................... 119 Remote control code default settings ............. 104 Remote control codes settings ....................... 104 Remote control ID setting .............................. 119 Remote control using ....................................... 12 Remote control, troubleshooting ................... 124 REMOTE IN jack ............................................ 36 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ................................. 20 REMOTE OUT jack ........................................ 36 REMOTE SENSOR ...................................... 119 Remote sensor ................................................ 119 Rename ............................................................ 82 Rename ............................................................ 82 Repeat .............................................................. 65
141 En
Index
Repeat iPod playback ....................................... 65 Resetting the system ...................................... 127 Rev. Delay ....................................................... 79 Rev. Level ........................................................ 80 Rev. Time ......................................................... 79 Roleplaying Game ........................................... 58 Room Size ........................................................ 78 RS-232C STANDBY ..................................... 119 RS-232C terminal ............................................ 20
S VIDEO jacks ................................................. 28 Saving system settings ..................................... 96 SB Speaker Dist. .............................................. 84 SB. Init. Delay ................................................. 78 SB. Liveness .................................................... 79 SB. Room Size ................................................. 78 Sci-Fi ................................................................ 58 Scroll ................................................................ 93 Secondary DNS server ..................................... 92 Selecting audio input jacks .............................. 52 Selecting decoders ........................................... 72 Selecting front speaker set ............................... 51 Selecting sound field programs ........................ 54 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component .................. 50 Server, network menu ...................................... 66 Set the main zone to the standby mode ............ 39 Setting GUI language ....................................... 39 Setting speaker impedance ............................... 39 Set-top box connection .................................... 32 Setup ................................................................ 92 Setup ................................................................ 92 Short Message .................................................. 90 Short message display ...................................... 90 Shortcut buttons, Network/USB features ......... 70 Shuffle .............................................................. 65 Shuffle iPod playback ...................................... 65 Signal Info., GUI menu .................................... 95 SILENT CINEMA ........................................... 60 SILENT CINEMA indicator, Front panel display ...................................... 41 SLEEP indicator, Front panel display .............. 41 Sleep timer ....................................................... 52 Sound field indicators, Front panel display ......... 40 Sound field parameter descriptions .................. 78 Sound field program selection ......................... 54 Sound field programs ....................................... 54 Sound field programs with headphones ........... 60 Sound field programs without surround speakers ........................... 60 Sound, Manual Setup ....................................... 86 Sound, Manual setup ........................................ 86 SOURCE, Operation mode selector ................ 12 SP A B indicators, Front panel display ............ 40 Speaker B ......................................................... 91 Speaker B setting ............................................. 91 Speaker cable connection ................................. 27 Speaker Distance .............................................. 85 Speaker distance .............................................. 85 Speaker distances ............................................. 85 SPEAKER IMP. ............................................. 119 Speaker impedance ........................................ 119 Speaker impedance setting ............................... 39 Speaker Level .................................................. 86 Speaker level .................................................... 86 Speaker level adjustment ................................. 61 Speaker Set ...................................................... 84 Speaker setting optimize .................................. 42 Speaker settings ............................................... 84 Speaker terminals ............................................. 20 Speaker wiring, Auto setup parameter ....... 44, 46
Speakers, placement .........................................21 Specifications .................................................138 Spectacle ...........................................................58 Sports ................................................................57 Standard ............................................................58 Standby Charge ................................................93 Standby mode, Zone2, Zone3 ........................116 Standby Through ..............................................94 Standby through ...............................................94 Standing wave control ......................................87 Status ................................................................93 STEREO ...........................................................59 Stereo program parameter descriptions ............80 Stereo/Surround menu, GUI menu ...................77 Stereo/Surround, GUI menu .............................77 STRAIGHT ......................................................60 Straight Enhancer .............................................59 STRAIGHT mode ............................................60 Subnet Mask .....................................................92 Subnet mask .....................................................92 Subwoofer ........................................................85 Subwoofer ..................................................25, 85 Subwoofer configuration ..................................85 Subwoofer connection ......................................25 Subwoofer phase ..............................................85 Subwoofer using ...............................................25 Supplied accessories .........................................11 Support Audio ..................................................94 Support audio ...................................................94 Sur. Back L Level .............................................80 Sur. Back R Level ............................................80 SUR. DECODE ................................................59 Sur. Init. Delay .................................................78 Sur. Liveness ....................................................79 Sur. Room Size .................................................78 Surround ...........................................................84 Surround Back ..................................................84 Surround back left/right speakers .....................84 Surround back speaker distance .......................84 Surround Decode ..............................................59 Surround decode mode .....................................72 Surround L Level .............................................80 Surround left/right speakers .............................84 Surround R Level .............................................80 S-wave control ..................................................87 System ..............................................................93 System ID .........................................................93 System Memory ...............................................96 System memory ................................................96 System reset ....................................................127 System setting saving .......................................96 System settings loading ....................................98
TRIGGER OUT jack ....................................... 20 Trigger Output ................................................. 94 Trigger output .................................................. 94 Troubleshooting ............................................. 122 Tuner Select ..................................................... 92 Turning off this unit ......................................... 39 Turning on the main zone from the standby mode ................................ 39 Turning on this unit ......................................... 39 TV controlling by Remote control ................. 102 TV controlling, Remote control ..................... 102 TV FORMAT ................................................ 120 TV format ...................................................... 120 TV monitor connection .................................... 30 TV, Operation mode selector ........................... 12
Unit .................................................................. 85 Unit .................................................................. 85 Unprocessed input source playback ................. 60 USB memory device connection ..................... 37 USB memory device using .............................. 69 USB menu ........................................................ 66 USB port .......................................................... 20 USB port select ................................................ 83 USB portable audio player using ..................... 69 USB Select ....................................................... 83 USB, troubleshooting .................................... 124 USB, USB menu .............................................. 66
Target:Zone2 ....................................................91 Target:Zone3 ....................................................91 Target:Zone4 ....................................................91 The Bottom Line ..............................................57 The Roxy Theatre .............................................57 THX ..................................................................59 THX Set ............................................................83 THX settings ....................................................83 THX Ultra2 subwoofer setting .........................83 THX Ultra2 SWFR ...........................................83 Tonal quality adjustment ..................................61 Tone Control ....................................................88 Tone control .....................................................88 Transmit indicator, remote control ...................12 Treble ...............................................................88 Treble control ...................................................88 TRIGGER IN jacks ..........................................36 Trigger operation mode ....................................94
VCR connection ............................................... 33 Vertical dialogue position ................................ 77 VIDEO AUX jacks .......................................... 38 Video component jacks .................................... 20 Video conversion ............................................. 89 Video Info. ....................................................... 95 Video information ............................................ 95 VIDEO jacks .................................................... 28 Video jacks ...................................................... 28 Video Manual setup ......................................... 89 Video signal flow ............................................. 29 Video source playback in background ............. 51 Video, Manual Setup ....................................... 89 Village Gate ..................................................... 56 Village Vanguard ............................................. 56 Virtual CINEMA DSP ..................................... 60 VIRTUAL indicator, Front panel display ........ 40 VOLTAGE SELECTOR, Voltage selector ......... 12 VOLUME level indicator, Front panel display ...................................... 41 Volume Trim ................................................... 82 Volume trimming ............................................. 82 Volume, Manual Setup .................................... 86 Volume, Manual setup ..................................... 86
Wake on RS-232C access .............................. 119 Wall Paper ........................................................ 91 Wall paper ........................................................ 91 Warehouse Loft ................................................ 57 Wiring, Auto setup parameter .................... 44, 46
YPAO .............................................................. 42 YPAO indicator, Front panel display .............. 41
Zone 2 balance ................................................. 92 Zone 2 initial volume setting ........................... 92 Zone 2 Maximum volume setting .................... 91 Zone 2 monaural mode .................................... 92 Zone 2 settings ................................................. 91
142 En
Index
Zone 2/3/4 muting type .................................... 92 Zone 2/3/4 tuner function select ...................... 92 Zone 3 balance ................................................. 92 Zone 3 initial volume setting ........................... 92 Zone 3 Maximum volume setting .................... 91 Zone 3 monaural mode .................................... 92 Zone 3 settings ................................................. 91 Zone 4 balance ................................................. 92 Zone 4 initial volume setting ........................... 92 Zone 4 Maximum volume setting .................... 91 Zone 4 monaural mode .................................... 92 Zone 4 settings ................................................. 91 Zone B feature ................................................. 51 Zone indicators, remote control ....................... 12 Zone on-screen display .................................... 92 Zone OSD ........................................................ 92 ZONE OUT jacks ............................................ 20 Zone SP Assign ............................................... 91 Zone speaker assignment ................................. 91 Zone video monitor ....................................... 114 Zone video out jacks ........................................ 20 Zone video signal conversion ........................ 114 Zone2 Balance ................................................. 92 Zone2 Initial Vol. ............................................ 92 Zone2 Max Vol. ............................................... 91 Zone2 Mono .................................................... 92 Zone2 Set ......................................................... 91 ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 indicators, Front panel display ...................................... 41 Zone3 Balance ................................................. 92 Zone3 Initial Vol. ............................................ 92 Zone3 Max Vol. ............................................... 91 Zone3 Mono .................................................... 92 Zone3 Set ......................................................... 91 Zone4 Balance ................................................. 92 Zone4 Initial Vol. ............................................ 92 Zone4 Max Vol. ............................................... 91 Zone4 Mono .................................................... 92 Zone4 Set ......................................................... 91
A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF or 3 DVD (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the cover pages at the top of this manual for the information about each position of the parts.
143 En
List of remote control codes

TV
ACURA ADDISON ADMIRAL ADVENT AGB AIKO AKAI 00101 01201, 01601, 08401 01301, 02201, 05801 09601 06801 01201 00101, 00301, 02901, 04601, 06801, 08901, 10501 AKURA 03701 ALBA 00101, 00401, 04801, 08501 AMERICA ACTION 02701, AMPRO 09401 AMSTRAD 00101, 00401, 02501, 04801, 05101, 05301, 06801 ANAM 00101, 02701, 03401 ANAM NATIONAL 03401, 08301 ANITECH 00101 AOC 00101, 00301, 00901, 01201, 01301, 01601, 02601, 02701, 05601 APEX DIGITAL 09301, 09701, 09901 ASA 01401 AUDIOSONIC 00401, 01701 AWA 00101 BANG & OLUFSEN 07201 BASIC 00101 BAUR 00401, 04601, 06701 BAYSONIC 02701 BEAUMARK 02601 BEKO 04701, 06201, 09001, 09101 BELL & HOWELL 02001 BEON 00401 BLAUPUNKT 02801 BLUE SKY 08501, 11401 BONDSTEC 03301 BRADFORD 02701 BRANDT 01701, 04201 BROKSONIC 03101, 05801 BUSH 00101, 00101, 00401, 04801, 04901, 08501, 11401 BYDESIGN 14301, 14401, 14501, 14601 CANDLE 00301 CARNIVALE 00301 CARVER 00801, 02401 CASCADE 00101 CATHAY 00401 CCE 00401 CELEBRITY 00001 CELERA 09701 CENTURION 00401 CGE 03301 CHANGHONG 09701 CHING TAI 00101, 01201 CHUN YUN 00001, 00101, 01201, 02701 CHUNG HSIN 00701, 01601, 02701 CIMLINE 00101 CINERAL 01201, 05601 CITIZEN 00301, 00901, 01201 CLARION 02701 CLARIVOX 00401 CLATRONIC 03301, 04701 CONDOR 04101, 04701 CONRAC 10301 CONTEC 00101, 02701 CRAIG 02701 CROSLEY 00801 CROWN 00101, 00401, 02701, 04701, 05201 CTC 03301 CURTIS MATHES 00301, 00501, 00801, 00901, 01301, 01801, 02001, 02301, 05601, 08901, 11801, 12201 02701 00101, 00301, 00401, 01201, 01601, 02001, 02401, 02601, 02701, 04901, 05601, 07901, 08201, 13101 00401 00101 02901, 06901 00401, 06801 01801 00401 00101, 00401 00201 09201, 10101 00401 03501 HELLO KITTY HINARI HISAWA HITACHI 05601 00101, 00401 05701 00101, 00301, 01201, 01501, 01701, 01801, 02201, 02601, 03001, 04501, 06101, 06901, 07301, 11701, 12101 HUA TUN 00101 HUANYU 04901 HYPSON 00401, 03701 ICE 03701, 04801 IMPERIAL 03301, 04701, 05201 INDIANA 00401 INFINITY 00801 INGELEN 02201 INNO HIT 06801 INNOVA 00401 INTEQ 00201 INTERFUNK 00401, 02201, 03301, 04601, 06701 INTERVISION 00401, 03701, 05001 ITS 04801 ITT 02201, 04601, 06901 JBL 00801 JCB 00001 JEAN 00101, 00601, 01201, 02101, 03101 JENSEN 09601 JVC 00701, 04801, 05801, 08401, 08701 KAISUI 00101 KAPSCH 02201 KARCHER 07701 KATHREIN 07001 KEC 02701 KENDO 00401 KENWOOD 00301 KNEISSEL 03501, 05401 KOLIN 00701, 01601, 02701 KORPEL 00401 KOYODA 00101 KTV 00301, 02701 L&S ELECTRONIC 10301 LEYCO 00401, 03701 LG 00301, 00401, 00901, 01601, 02601, 09001 LIESENK & TTER 00401 LOEWE 06701 LUXOR 04501, 04601 LXI 00501, 00801, 02001, 02101, 02601 M ELECTRONIC 00101, 00401, 01401, 01501, 01701, 02201, 03801, 04401, 04901, 06001 MAGNADYNE 03301, 06801 MAGNAFON 06801 MAGNAVOX 00301, 00801, 12001, 12601 MANESTH 03701, 04101 MARANTZ 00301, 00401, 00801, 07001 MARK 00401 MATSUI 00101, 00401, 02901, 04801, 06301, 06801 MATSUSHITA 03401, 08301 MEDIATOR 00401 MEDION 08501, 10301, 11401 MEGATRON 01801, 02601 MEMOREX 00101, 01901, 02001, 02601, 03401, 05801, 11401 METZ 05501 MGA 00301, 01901, 02601 MICROMAXX 10301 MICROSTAR 10301 MIDLAND 00201, 00501, 00601 MINERVA 06301 MINOKA 05101 MITSUBISHI 00301, 01301, 01601, 01901, 02001, 02601, 02701, 03101, 03401, 06701, 11201, 11901 03901, 04001, 06801, 07601 01301 00301, 00901, 06701 00101, 02701 07001 02101, 02601, 04601, 11301 00101, 00301, 00601, 02001, 02101, 02401, 02601, 05701, 06501, 13201 00401, 07001 00401 00401 00101, 01201, 01301, 02601 00401, 03701 00301, 01201, 02601 04601, 05901, 06001, 06901, 08101 09301, 10801 01701, 03801, 07101 01201 02201, 04601 02701, 05301 02001, 02301, 03401, 08301 01301 00401, 03101, 04101, 05801, 06801 03701, 05101 00401, 04101, 06701, 07001 04701, 05201 03701 00401, 00601, 00801, 02201, 03401, 08301, 12401
MIVAR MOTOROLA MTC MULTITECH MYRYAD NAD NEC
CXC DAEWOO
DANSAI DAYTON DE GRAAF DECCA DENON DIGATRON DIXI DUMONT DWIN ECE ELBE ELECTROBAND
NECKERMANN NEI NETSAT NEWAVE NIKKAI NIKKO NOKIA NORCENT NORDMENDE NTC OCEANIC ONWA OPTIMUS OPTONICA ORION OSAKI OTTO VERSAND
00001 ELIN 00401, 06901 ELITE 04101 ELTA 00101 EMERSON 02001, 02601, 02701, 03101, 04601, 05801, 07901 ENVISION 00301, 10601 EPSON 11001 ERRES 00401 ETHER 00101, 00301 ETRON 00101 EUROPHON 06801 FERGUSON 00401, 01001, 01701, 03201, 03801, 04201, 07101 FIDELITY 04601 FINLANDIA 02901, 04401 FINLUX 00401, 01401, 01501, 04401, i06801 FIRSTAR 00101, 03101 FIRSTLINE 00101, 03301, 08501 FISHER 01401, 02001, 02901, 04701 FLINT 05701 FORMENTI 00401, 04101 FORTRESS 01301 FRONTECH 02201, 03301, 03701 FUJITSU 08701, 10401 FUNAI 02501, 02701, 03701 FUTURETECH 02701 GATEWAY 13301, 13401 GE 00301, 00501, 00601, 01201, 02601, 02701, 05601, 07101, 11801, 12201, 12601 GEC 00401, 06801 GELOSO 00101 GENEXXA 02201 GIBRALTER 00201, 00301 GOLDSTAR 00301, 00401, 01701, 02001, 02601, 05001 GOODMANS 00401, 04801, 04901, 08201 GOREMJE 04701 GRADIENTE 00701, 02401 GRAETZ 02201, 04601 GRANADA 00401, 02901, 04301, 06801 GRANDIN 07701 GRUNDIG 00401, 02801, 06301, 07001, 07401 GRUNPY 02701 HALLMARK 02601 HANKOOK 00301, 02601, 02701 HANSEATIC 00401, 04101, 04601, 05201, 07001 HANTAREX 06801 HARMAN/KARDON 00801 HARVARD 02701 HAVERMY 01301 HCM 00101, 05101
PALLADIUM PANAMA PANASONIC
PATHE CINEMA 03201, 04101 00101 00301, 00501, 00601, 00901, 02101, 02601, 12201 PERDIO 04101 PHILCO 00301, 00401, 00801, 01801, 02601, 02701, 03301, 05801, 13101 PHILIPS 00001, 00301, 00401, 00601, 00801, 01201, 01601, 02601, 04901, 07001, 08801, 12601 PHONOLA 00401 PILOT 00301 PIONEER 01701, 02201, 02301, 03801, 08601, 09501, 11301 PORTLAND 01201 PRANDONI-PRINCE 06801 PRIMA 09601 PRISM 00601 PROFEX 00101, 04601 PROSCAN 00501 PROTECH 00101, 00401, 03301, 03701, 05201, 08501 PROTON 00101, 00301, 02601 PULSAR 00201 QUASAR 00601, 03401, 08301 QUELLE 00401, 01401, 04601, 06701 RADIOLA 00401 RADIOMARELLI 06801 RADIOSHACK 00301, 00501, 02001, 02601, 02701 PAUSA PENNEY
144 En
List of remote control codes RCA 00001, 00301, 00501, 01101, 01201, 02601, 08601, 11501, 11801, 13901, 12201, 12501, 12601, 12801 REALISTIC 00301, 02001, 02601, 02701 REDIFFUSION 04601 REOC 09001 REVOX 00401 REX 02201, 03501, 03701 RFT 05201 R-LINE 00401 ROADSTAR 00101, 03701, 05201 RUNCO 00201, 00301, 06501, 07501 SABA 01701, 02201, 03801, 04201 SACCS 03201 SAGEM 07701 SAISHO 00101, 03701, 06801 SALORA 02201, 04601, 06901 SAMBERS 06801 SAMPO 00101, 00301, 01201, 01301, 02001, 02501, 02601, 08301, 13301 SAMSUNG 00101, 00301, 00401, 00901, 01101, 01201, 02001, 02601, 03701, 04701, 07001, 07401, 07801, 08901, 09801, 10501, 10701 SANSEI 05601 SANSUI 05801 SANYO 01401, 02001, 02701, 02901, 04301, 10201 SBR 00401 SCHAUB LORENZ 04601 SCHNEIDER 00401, 03301, 04801, 08501 SCOTCH 02601 SCOTT 02601, 02701, 03101 SEARS 00501, 00801, 02001, 02101, 02501, 02601 SEG 03701, 08501 SEI 06801 SELECO 02201, 03501 SEMIVOX 02701 SEMP 02101 SHARP 00301, 01301, 08301 SHEN YING 00101, 01201 SHENG CHIA 00101, 01301, 03101 SIAREM 06801 SIEMENS 00401, 02801 SINUDYNE 06801 SKANTIC 04501 SKY 00401 SKYGIANT 02701 SKYWORTH 00401 SOLAVOX 02201 SONITRON 02901 SONOKO 00101, 00401 SONOLOR 02201, 02901 SONTEC 00401 SONY 00001, 08301, 11101, 11601, 12701, 12901 SOUNDESIGN 02601, 02701 SOUNDWAVE 00401, 05201 SOWA 00601, 00901, 01201, 02101, 02601 SQUAREVIEW 02501 SSS 02701 STANDARD 00101 STARLITE 02701 STERN 02201, 03501 SUPREME 00001 SYLVANIA 00301, 00801, 02501 SYMPHONIC 02501, 02701 SYNCO 00001, 00901, 01201, 01301, 02601, 05601 SYSLINE 00401 T+A 05501 TACICO 00101, 01201, 02601 TAI YI 00101 TANDY 01301, 02201 TASHIKO 01201, 08301 TATUNG 00101, 00401, 00601, 00801, 00901, 02001, 02101, 06801 TCM TEAC 10301 00101, 00401, 03701, 05101, 05201, 05701, 08501, 11401 03301 04101 00601, 03401, 08301 00601 00101, 00601, 01201, 01301, 02601, 03701, 08401 00801, 00901, 01201, 01901, 02701 01701, 03601, 04201, 08001, 08901 BASIC LINE 01402, 02102 BEAUMARK 02002 BELL & HOWELL 01602 BLAUPUNKT 01902 BRANDT 02402 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 00602 BROKSONIC 01702, 02602, 04402 BUSH 01402, 02102, 02702 CALIX 00402 CANON 00302 CARVER 01502 CCE 01402, 02102 CGE 00002 CIMLINE 01402 CINERAL 02102 CITIZEN 00402, 02102, 04302 COLT 01402 COMBITECH 02702 CRAIG 00402, 01002, 01402, 02002 CROWN 01402, 02102 CURTIS MATHES 00302, 00602, 01202, 03702 CYBERNEX 02002 CYRUS 01502 DAEWOO 00902, 01602, 02102, 03402, 04302 DANSAI 01402 DE GRAAF 00702 DECCA 00002, 01502 DENON 00702 DUAL 00602 DUMONT 00002, 01502, 01602 DYNATECH 00002 ELCATECH 01402 ELECTROHOME 00402 ELECTROPHONIC 00402 EMEREX 00102 EMERSON 00002, 00302, 00402, 00802, 00902, 01702, 02002, 02102, 04302, 04402 ESC 02002, 02102 FERGUSON 00602, 02402 FIDELITY 00002 FINLANDIA 01502, 01602 FINLUX 00002, 00702, 01502, 01602 FIRSTLINE 00402, 00802, 00902, 01402 FISHER 01002, 01602 FUJI 00202, 00302 FUJITSU 00002, 00902 FUNAI 00002 GARRARD 00002 GE 00302, 01202, 02002, 03502, 03702, 03802 GEC 01502 GENERAL 00902 GO VIDEO 02802 GOLDHAND 01402 GOLDSTAR 00402, 01802, 02902, 04202 GOODMANS 00002, 00402, 01402, 02102 GRADIENTE 00002 GRAETZ 00602, 01602, 02002 GRANADA 01502, 01602 GRANDIN 00002, 00402, 01402 GRUNDIG 01402, 01502, 01902, 02502 HANSEATIC 00402 HARLEY DAVIDSON 00002 HARMAN/KARDON 01502 HARWOOD 01402 HCM 01402 HINARI 01402, 02002, 02702 HI-Q 01002 HITACHI 00002, 00402, 00602, 00702, 02002 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 00702 HYPSON 01402 IMPERIAL INTERFUNK ITT ITV JENSEN JVC KAISUI KEC KENWOOD KLH KODAK KOLIN KORPEL LENCO LEYCO LG LLOYDS LOEWE LOGIK LUXOR LXI M ELECTRONIC MAGNASONIC MAGNAVOX 00002 01502 00602, 01602, 02002 00402, 02102 00602 00602, 00902, 01302 01402 00402, 02102 00602, 01302 01402 00302, 00402 00602, 00802 01402 02102 01402 00402, 00702, 00902, 02902 00002 00402, 01502, 04502 01402, 02002 00802, 01102, 01602 00402
TEC TECHNEMA TECHNICS TECHWOOD TECO
TEKNIKA TELEFUNKEN TELEMEISTER
04101 00101 04101 00301 01701, 03801, 07101, 08001, 12501 THORN 00401, 01401, 04601, 06701 TMK 02601 TNCI 00201 TOSHIBA 00901, 02001, 02101, 06601, 07801, 08301, 10901, 12101, 12301, 13001, 13201 TRIUMPH 06801 TUNTEX 00101, 00301, 01201 TVS 05801 UHER 04101 UNIVERSUM 00401, 01401, 01501, 03701, 04401, 04701, 06401 VECTOR RESEARCH 00301 VESTEL 00401 VICTOR 00701, 03401, 08301, 08401 VIDEOSAT 03301 VIDIKRON 00801 VIDTECH 02601 VIEWSONIC 13301 VISION 04101 VOXSON 02201 WALTHAM 04501 WARDS 00301, 00801, 02601, 11301 WATSON 00401, 04101 WAYCON 02101 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 00401, 04101, 05801, 07901 Yamaha 00301, 01801, 08301, 10001, 11001, 13501, 13601, 13701, 13801, 14001, 14101, 14201 YAPSHE 03401 YOKO 00401, 03701 ZENITH 00201, 01201, 02601, 05801 TELETECH TENSAI TERA THOMSON
VCR
ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA 01102 00002 02102 00002, 00402, 02202, 02602, 02702 AKAI 00602, 02302 AKIBA 01402 ALBA 01402, 02102, 02302, 02702 AMERICA ACTION 02102 AMERICAN HIGH 00302 AMSTRAD 00002 ANAM 00402, 01902, 02002, 02102, 02902 ANAM NATIONAL 01902, 04502 ANITECH 01402 ASA 00402, 01502 ASHA 02002 ASUKA 00402 AUDIOVOX 00402, 02102 BAIRD 00002, 00602, 01602
00002 04302 00002, 00302, 00502, 01502 MAGNIN 02002 MANESTH 00902, 01402 MARANTZ 00302, 01502 MARTA 00402 MATSUI 02602, 02702 MATSUSHITA 00302 MEDION 02602 MEI 00302 MEMOREX 00002, 00302, 00402, 00502, 01002, 01102, 01602, 02002, 02202, 02602, 04202 MEMPHIS 01402 METZ 00402, 02502, 04502 MGA 00802, 02002 MGN TECHNOLOGY 02002 MINOLTA 00702 MITSUBISHI 00602, 00802, 01302, 01502, 03502 MOTOROLA 00302, 01102 MTC 00002, 02002 MULTITECH 00002, 01402 MURPHY 00002 MYRYAD 01502 NAD 01602 NATIONAL 01902 NEC 00302, 00402, 00602, 01102, 01302, 01602 NECKERMANN 01502 NESCO 01402 NEWAVE 00402 NIKKO 00402 NOBLEX 02002 NOKIA 00602, 01602, 02002 NORDMENDE 00602, 02402 OCEANIC 00002, 00602 OKANO 02302, 02602 OLYMPUS 00302, 01902 OPTIMUS 00402, 01102, 01602, 02802 ORION 01702, 02602, 02702, 04402 OSAKI 00002, 00402, 01402 OTTO VERSAND 01502 PALLADIUM 00402, 00602, 01402 PANASONIC 00302, 01802, 01902, 03102, 03702, 04502 PATHE MARCONI 00602 PENNEY 00302, 00402, 00702, 02002, 03702, 04202 PENTAX 00702 PERDIO 00002 PHILCO 00302 PHILIPS 00302, 01502, 03202, 03902, 04002 PHONOLA 01502 PILOT 00402 PIONEER 00702, 01302, 01502 POLK AUDIO 01502
145 En
List of remote control codes PROFITRONIC PROLINE PROSCAN PROTEC PULSAR PYE QUASAR QUELLE RADIOLA RADIOSHACK RADIX RANDEX RCA 02002 00002 01202, 03802 01402 00502 01502 00302, 03702 01502 01502 00002 00402 00402 00302, 00702, 01202, 02002, 03502, 03702, 03802 REALISTIC 00002, 00302, 00402, 01002, 01102, 01602 REOC 02602 REPLAYTV 03002, 03102 REX 00602 ROADSTAR 00402, 01402, 02002, 02102 RUNCO 00502 SABA 00602, 02402 SALORA 00802 SAMPO 00402, 01102 SAMSUNG 00902, 02002, 02802 SANKY 00502, 01102 SANSUI 00002, 00602, 01302, 04402 SANYO 01002, 01602, 02002 SAVILLE 02702 SBR 01502 SCHAUB LORENZ 00002, 00602, 01602 SCHNEIDER 00002, 01402, 01502 SCOTT 00802, 00902, 01702 SEARS 00002, 00302, 00402, 00702, 01002, 01602, 04202 SEG 02002 SEI 01502 SELECO 00602 SEMP 00902 SHARP 01102, 03502 SHINTOM 01402, 01602 SIEMENS 00402, 01502, 01602 SILVA 00402 SINGER 00902, 01402 SINUDYNE 01502 SONIC BLUE 03002, 03102 SONTEC 00402 SONY 00002, 00102, 00202, 00302, 03302, 04102 STS 00702 SUNKAI 02602 SUNSTAR 00002 SUNTRONIC 00002 SYLVANIA 00002, 00302, 00802, 01502 SYMPHONIC 00002 TANDY 00002, 01602 TASHIKO 00002, 00402 TATUNG 00002, 00602, 00902, 01302, 01502 TEAC 00002, 00602, 02102, 02202, 03402 TECHNICS 00302, 01902 TECO 00302, 00402, 00602, 01102 TEKNIKA 00002, 00302, 00402 TELEAVIA 00602 TELEFUNKEN 00602, 02402 TENOSAL 01402 TENSAI 00002 THOMAS 00002 THOMSON 00602, 01202, 01302, 02402 THORN 00602, 01602 TIVO 03202, 03302 TMK 02002 TOSHIBA 00602, 00802, 00902, 01302, 01502, 03602 TOTEVISION 00402, 02002 UHER 02002 UNITECH 02002 UNIVERSUM 00002, 00402, 01502, 02002 VECTOR 00902 VICTOR 00602, 01302 VIDEO CONCEPTS 00902 VIDEOMAGIC 00402 VIDEOSONIC 02002 VILLAIN 00002 WARDS 00002, 00302, 00702, 01002, 01102, 01202, 01402, 01502, 02002 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 01402 XR-1000 00002, 00302, 01402 Yamaha 00602 YAMISHI 01402 YOKAN 01402 YOKO 02002 ZENITH 00002, 00202, 00502, 04402 CANAL+ CHAPARRAL CITYCOM CONNEXIONS CROSSDIGITAL CYRUS DAERYUNG DAEWOO D-BOX DIGENIUS DIRECTV 03104 00804 05304 01304 04604 00704 01304 06304 02104, 04904 01104 00904, 01204, 01504, 01704, 02204, 02304, 02804, 04104, 04604, 05104, 06904 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 02604, 03704 DISHPRO 02604, 03704 DISTRATEL 00004 DMT 04004 DNT 00704, 01304 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 05804 ECHOSTAR 00504, 01304, 01604, 02604, 03104, 03604, 03704, 04304 ENGEL 03804 EXPRESSVU 02604 FINLUX 01404 FOXTEL 07004, 07104, 07204, 07304, 07404 FRACARRO 03604 FTE 03404 FUBA 01304 GALAXIS 03404, 04704 GE 01504 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 03504 GOI 02604 GOLD BOX 03104 GRUNDIG 00604, 03004 HIRSCHMANN 00604, 01304 HITACHI 01404, 02804 HTS 02604 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM 02304, 05104, 06904 HUMAX 03404, 05304 INVIDEO 03604 JVC 02604 KATHREIN 00104, 00604, 00704, 01004, 01804, 05604 KREISELMEYER 00604 LABGEAR 06304 LOGIX 03804 LORENZEN 01104 MAGNAVOX 02004, 02204 MANHATTAN 01404, 03804, 04204 MARANTZ 00704 MEDIASAT 03104 MEMOREX 02204 METRONIC 00004 MITSUBISHI 02304 MOTOROLA 03504 MYRYAD 00704 NEXT LEVEL 03504 NOKIA 01404, 02104, 02404, 04904, 05704, 06804 OCTALTV 03704 ORBITECH 04504 PACE 01404, 03004, 05204, 06604 PANASONIC 00904, 01904, 03004, 06504 PANDA 01404 PAYSAT 02204 PHILIPS 00204, 00704, 01404, 02004, 02204, 02304, 03104, 04104, 05104, 06904 PIONEER 03104 PROMAX 01404 PROSCAN 01204, 01504 RADIOLA 00704 RADIOSHACK 03504 RADIX 01304 RCA 00404, 01204, 01504, 03204 RFT 00704 SABRE 01404 SAGEM SAMSUNG 02904, 04804, 05904 03804, 04604, 06004, 06204 SAT CONTROL 06404 SATSTATION 04204 SCHWAIGER 04704 SEEMANN 01304 SIEMENS 00604 SKY 03004, 03304, 05204 SM ELECTRONIC 05404 SONY 01704, 03004, 06704 STAR CHOICE 03504 STRONG 06404 TANTEC 01404 TECHNISAT 04404, 04504 TELESTAR 04504 THOMSON 01404, 03104, 03904, 06104 TOPFIELD 05504 TOSHIBA 02304, 02704, 06904 TPS 02904, 05904 ULTIMATETV 01204, 01704 UNIDEN 02004, 02204 UNIVERSUM 00604 VENTANA 00704 WISI 00604, 01304, 01404 XSAT 00104 ZEHNDER 04004 ZENITH 03304
CABLE
ABC 00103, 00203 AMERICAST 02003 BELL SOUTH 02003 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 00803 BRITISH TELECOM 00103 DAERYUNG 00203, 01403, 01903 DIRECTOR 01303 FILMNET 01203 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 00103, 00803, 01303, 01703 GOLDSTAR 00503 HAMLIN 00303, 00703 JERROLD 00103, 00803, 01303, 01703 LG 00503 MEMOREX 00003 MNET 01203 MOTOROLA 00803, 01303, 01703, 02303 NOOS 01803 PACE 00603, 02203 PANASONIC 00003, 00203, 00403 PARAGON 00003 PHILIPS 01003, 01103 PIONEER 00503, 01603, 01903 PULSAR 00003 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 00103 QUASAR 00003 RCA 02403, 02503 REGAL 00703, 00903 RUNCO 00003 SAGEM 01803 SAMSUNG 00003, 00503 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 00203, 01403, 01903 SONY 02103 STARCOM 00103 SUPERCABLE 00803 TELE+1 01203 TORX 00103 TOSHIBA 00003 TRANS PX 00803 TS 00103 UNITED CABLE 00103 ZENITH 00003, 01503, 02003
CD PLAYER
AIWA 00605 ARCAM 00605 AUDIO RESEARCH 00605 AUDIO TON 00605 AUDIOLAB 00605 AUDIOMECA 00605 CAIRN 00605 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 00205 CARVER 00605, 00805 CYRUS 00605 DENON 01005 DKK 00005 DMX ELECTRONICS 00605 DYNAMIC BASS 00805 EMERSON 00905 FISHER 00805 GENEXXA 00305, 00905 GOODMANS 00905 GRUNDIG 00605 HARMAN/KARDON 00605, 00705 HITACHI 00305 JVC 00505 KENWOOD 00105, 00405 KRELL 00605 LINN 00605 LXI 00905 MAGNAVOX 00605, 00905 MARANTZ 00205, 00605 MATSUI 00605 MCS 00205 MEMOREX 00905 MERIDIAN 00605 MICROMEGA 00605 MIRO 00005 MISSION 00605 MYRYAD 00605 NAD 00005 NAIM 00605 NSM 00605 OPTIMUS 00005, 00305, 00405, 00805, 00905 PANASONIC 00205 PHILIPS 00605 PIONEER 00305, 00905 POLK AUDIO 00605 PROTON 00605 QED 00605 QUAD 00605 QUASAR 00205 RCA 00305, 00805, 00905 REALISTIC 00805 REVOX 00605
SATELLITE TUNER
@SAT 06404 ABSAT 00104 ALBA 01404 ALPHASTAR 02504 AMSTRAD 03004 ASTON 00304, 05004 ASTRO 00604 ATSAT 06404 AVALON 01304 BLAUPUNKT 00604 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 03004, 05204 CANAL DIGITAL 03104 CANAL SATELLITE 03104
146 En
List of remote control codes ROTEL 00605 SAE 00605 SANSUI 00605, 00905 SANYO 00805 SCOTT 00905 SEARS 00905 SHARP 00405 SIMAUDIO 00605 SONIC FRONTIERS 00605 SONY 00005 SYMPHONIC 00905 TAG MCLAREN 00605 TANDY 00305 TECHNICS 00205 THORENS 00605 THULE 00605 UNIVERSUM 00605 VICTOR 00505 WARDS 00605 Yamaha 01105, 01205 RCA 00306, 01006, 02606 ROTEL 01306 SAMSUNG 01106, 04506 SANYO 02006 SHARP 01406 SHERWOOD 03206 SHINSONIC 00506 SLIM ART 03306 SM ELECTRONIC 02806 SONY 00506, 04006 SYLVANIA 02206 TATUNG 03206 TEAC 01006, 02606 TECHNICS 00006 THETA DIGITAL 01006 THOMSON 00306 TOSHIBA 00106, 04606 URBAN CONCEPTS 00106 XBOX 00306 Yamaha 00006, 00706, 00806, 04306, 04406 ZENITH 00106, 01206, 02906 ZEUS 03306 JVC 00110, 00710, 03410, 04110 KENWOOD 01010, 03010 KLH 03810, 04010 MAGNAVOX 00710, 01210, 01510, 02110 MARANTZ 00010, 01210, 01510, 02410 MCS 00010 MICROMEGA 01510 MUSICMAGIC 01210 MYRYAD 01510 NAD 00610 NORCENT 03710 ONKYO 00310, 00810, 02510 OPTIMUS 00710, 00910 PANASONIC 00010, 02310, 04210, 04710 PHILIPS 01210, 01510, 01910, 02010, 02110, 02210, 02410 PIONEER 00710, 00910, 03510 POLK AUDIO 02410 PROSCAN 01710 QUASAR 00010 RCA 00710, 00910, 01710, 03810, 04310 SABA 00710 SANSUI 01210 SCHNEIDER 00710 SONY 00410, 01110, 01310, 04510, 04610 STEREOPHONICS 00910 SUNFIRE 03010 TEAC 03810 TECHNICS 00010, 02810, 02910, 04210 TELEFUNKEN 00710 THOMSON 01710 THORENS 01510 UHER 00710 VENTURER 03810 VICTOR 00110 WARDS 00410 Yamaha 00510, 01410, 03110, 04810, 05510, 05610, 05710, 05810 Yamaha (iPod) 05310 Yamaha (NET) 05410
CD RECORDER
KENWOOD MARANTZ PHILIPS Yamaha 01305 01305 01305 01405
DVD RECORDER
HITACHI PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER SHARP SONY TOSHIBA VICTOR Yamaha 01507 00007, 00107, 00207 00807 00407, 00507, 00607 01207, 01307 00907, 01007, 01107 00307 01407 00707
DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 02806 ALBA 02606 AMSTRAD 02306 APEX DIGITAL 02106, 02606, 03006, 03506, 03606, 03706, 04106 BLAUPINKT 02606 BLUE PARADE 01006 BUSH 02306 CENTREX 02106 CLATRONIC 03406 CYBERHOME 02406 DAEWOO 03206, 03306 DANSAI 03206 DECCA 03206 DENON 00006 DIAMOND 03106 DIGITREX 02106 DVD2000 00206 EMERSON 01206 ENTERPRISE 01206 FISHER 02006 GE 00306, 02606 GO VIDEO 02506 GOLDSTAR 02906 GRADIENTE 01806 GREENHILL 02606 GRUNDIG 00706 HITACHI 01106, 01906 HITEKER 02106 JVC 00906, 01306 KENWOOD 00006, 00606 KLH 02606 KOSS 01806 LG 02906 LIMIT 03106 MAGNAVOX 00106, 02206 MARANTZ 00706 MEMOREX 03806 MICO 02706 MICROSOFT 00306 MINTEK 02606 MITSUBISHI 00206 MUSTEK 02806 NESA 02606 ONKYO 00106 ORITRON 01806 PALSONIC 02106 PANASONIC 00006, 01606, 04206 PHILIPS 00106, 00706, 01706, 03906 PIONEER 00406, 01006, 01506, 01606 POLK AUDIO 00706 PROSCAN 00306 QWESTAR 01806
LD PLAYER
CARVER DENON MARANTZ MITSUBISHI NAD NAGSMI OPTIMUS PHILIPS PIONEER SALORA SONY TELEFUNKEN Yamaha 00108 00008 00108 00008 00008 00008 00008 00108 00008 00108 00208 00008 00308
TAPE DECK
AIWA 00111 CARVER 00111 GRUNDIG 00111 HARMAN/KARDON 00111 MAGNAVOX 00111 MARANTZ 00111 MYRYAD 00111 OPTIMUS 00011 PHILIPS 00111 PIONEER 00011 POLK AUDIO 00111 RCA 00011 REVOX 00111 SANSUI 00111 SONY 00211 THORENS 00111 WARDS 00011 Yamaha 00311, 00411
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD ONKYO SHARP SONY Yamaha 00109 00309 00209 00009 00409, 00509, 00609
RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC AIWA ALCO ANAM APEX DIGITAL 00710 00410, 01210, 03610, 03910, 04410 03810 04310
01810 AUDIOLAB 01510 AUDIOTRONIC 01510 AUDIOVOX 03810 BOSE 01610 CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 03310 CAPETRONIC 00710 CARVER 01210, 01510 CENTREX 01810 DENON 03210 FERGUSON 00710 FINE ARTS 01510 GRUNDIG 01510 HARMAN/KARDON 00210, 02610 INTEGRA 00310, 02510 JBL 00210, 02710
147 En
2007
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VSTRA FRLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia
WK97760

Yamaha DSP-Z11 User Manual (English)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yamaha DSP-Z11 User Manual (English)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GEBRL

STRAIGHT ZONE CONTROLS

EFFECT REC OUT/ ZONE 2

ZONE 4 SILENT CINEMA

EFFECT REC OUT/ ZONE 2

MULTI BD HD DVD CBL SAT TUNER

DVR NET USB

SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU

REC NET RADIO USB

ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 7 8

CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB 1 2 3

MOVIE 5 THX 9 PARTY

ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 7 8

Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

Caution: Read this before operating your unit.

For U.K. customers

Special Instructions for U.K. Model

Internal Source Operation

Using Network/USB features ................................................... 66

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu..................................... 74

Sound field programs ............................................................... 54

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory).................................................................. 96

Using audio features ................................................................. 61

Remote control features ......................................................... 102

Introduction Preparation Basic Operation

Using multi-zone configuration ............................................. 111

Internal Source Operation Advanced Operation

Advanced setup ....................................................................... 119

This amplifier supports network connections.

Quick start guide .................................................................................. 13

Web control feature

Sound field programs P. 54

Automatic speaker setup features

Digital audio decoders

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) P. 28

iPod controlling capability P. 64

Simplified remote control

Batteries (4) (AAA, LR03)

MULTI BD HD DVD CBL SAT TUNER

DVR NET USB

INT SOURCE PRESET

SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU

RETURN MEMORY PC/MCX REC NET RADIO USB

CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB 1 2 3 MOVIE 5 THX 9 PARTY TV VOL STEREO 6

ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 7 8

Power cable (Two for Asia model)

Installing batteries in the remote control

Using the remote control

CATEGORY ZONE CONTROLS

SEARCH MODE REC OUT/ ZONE 2

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

Opening and closing the front panel door

VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

Quick start guide

Center Right rear presence Front left

Surround back right Surround back left Left rear presence

Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player

Preparation: Check the items Step 1: Set up your speakers

Step 3: Turn on the power and start playback

Enjoy Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD playback!

Quick start guide

Step 1: Set up your speakers

Right front presence speaker